Marshal of Sundown

By Jackson Gregory

The Project Gutenberg eBook of Marshal of Sundown

This ebook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this ebook or online
at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States,
you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located
before using this eBook.

Title: Marshal of Sundown

Author: Jackson Gregory

Release date: January 25, 2026 [eBook #77768]

Language: English

Original publication: New York: Grosset & Dunlap, 1938

Credits: Tim Lindell, David E. Brown, and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This book was produced from images made available by the HathiTrust Digital Library.)

*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MARSHAL OF SUNDOWN ***

MARSHAL OF SUNDOWN

MARSHAL OF
SUNDOWN

_By_
JACKSON GREGORY

[Illustration]

GROSSET & DUNLAP
_Publishers_ NEW YORK
_By arrangement with Dodd, Mead & Company_

PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA

MARSHAL OF SUNDOWN

CHAPTER I

When Jim Torrance, riding up from the South, crested the
live-oak-studded knoll from which he saw the rip-roaring little town
of Sundown for the first time, the place looked as clean and pretty
as a fresh picture, and as peaceful as the little dove cooing on a
dead limb over his head. But that was because Sundown was still a good
three miles away, and besides it was only mid-afternoon and not yet
first-drink time.

“I’m turning off here to go into town, Skeeter,” he told the boy
helping him with his handful of stock. “You go straight on with the
horses. You’ll know the place when you get there; just watch for an
old wheel track turning off where there’s a dead pine leaning over a
big white rock. Likely I’ll overtake you anyhow. It’s only about seven
miles.”

“Gee, Jim,” said Skeeter, “me, I’d like to see Sundown, too. I’ve heard
a lot about it.”

“Not today, kid. In two-three days I’ll pay you off and you can ride
where you please. Better hobble Barney and old Molly when you get
there. I’ll see if maybe I can get you a pie in town.”

The boy, convoying the dozen head of likely looking saddle horses and
the two heavily laden pack mules, rode on through the oaks, down the
farther side of the knoll, into the straggling pines on the slopes
beyond, and vanished in the creases of the hills which grew more
rugged and more thickly timbered as they rolled away toward the far
blue mountains in the north. Jim Torrance sat where he was a moment,
rolling a thoughtful cigarette and looking toward Sundown with
lazy-lidded eyes.

In the late October sunshine, as yellow as butter, under a sun-drenched
sky as deep a violet hue as the towering mountains in the for
background, at the end of a dusty road, wavering chalk-white across the
valley lined with quivering aspens in their brilliant autumn dress,
was a clutter of houses--and that was Sundown, where colors clashed
and laughed, the warm red of bricks, the white of adobe walls, the
weathered brown of shake roofs--and down in the valley there was a girl
with a bright red neckerchief, riding a dappled gray horse. She was at
considerable distance, on another road approaching Sundown from the
north.

Jim Torrance and the girl rode into town at the same time; they were
for an instant abreast as they came in front of Stag Horn Saloon. He
was seeing many things today for the first time, since, on the single
other occasion of coming into this neighborhood, he had kept straight
on from the farther side of the knoll where he had left Skeeter, and
had not come any nearer Sundown. So also for the first time he saw
Sally Dawn Cannon. She did not appear to notice him at all, though at
the sound of his horse’s hoofs she glanced his way. It was the most
fleeting of glances, indifferent, flashing elsewhere.

He had the trick of taking in everything with those keen dark eyes
of his, of registering swift impressions, of filing them away for
possible future reference. He thought, “She’s a little beauty if there
ever was one.” Not quite like other girls either, a sullen, smoldering
beauty, with brooding, smoky eyes.

He passed her and dismounted under the big poplar with butter-yellow
leaves that cast its black blot of shade in front of the saloon, and
she rode straight on. As he jingled down to the edge of the wooden
sidewalk, he turned his observant eyes upon the two men who were
standing there; they were watching the girl go by and spoke of her.

“Prettiest girl inside a hundred miles, Bordereau,” said one of them--a
short, stocky, immensely broad man, dressed in store clothes like a
town dweller, yet with the hard hands and weathered face of a rancher.

“Yes,” nodded Bordereau, and rolled his cigar and squinted after her.
A tall, darkly handsome man in frock coat and high hat, quiet-voiced,
even unctuous, it was a simple thing to mistake Steve Bordereau for a
prosperous undertaker. “Yes,” he said again, “she’s been getting better
looking all the time. Classier now than Florinda, even.”

“If she was dressed right, she’d be.” Then the heavy-set man laughed.
He said, “Now if you just had a girl like her in your place, you’d
double your intake!”

Steve Bordereau pursed a full lower lip.

“It’s an idea, Murdo. I’ll get her.”

“Like hell you will!”

“What’s this, Thursday? I’ll have her upstairs at midnight just exactly
one week from tonight. Midnight. Dressed right, too.”

“Bet?” challenged Murdo. There was only one way to settle things with
men like these two, one of whom owned and the other helped operate the
Stag Horn.

“Two to one,” said Bordereau coolly. “Five hundred of yours calls a
thousand from me.”

Murdo stared at him, seemed about to agree, then shook his head.

“You’ve got something up your sleeve, Steve. I know you. No bets.”

* * * * *

Jim Torrance tied his horse at the hitching rail under the poplar, hung
his spurs over the saddle horn and went into the saloon. There were not
half a dozen men in the place, cattle hands from the look of them, and
only one bartender behind the longest and most famous bar in this part
of the country. Torrance photographed them all with that low-lidded
glance characteristic of him; his survey began with the bartender and
came back to him, taking stock of his pale-blue eyes, his pale, sleek
hair that looked like the pictures in the barber shops, his mustaches
like a buffalo’s horns. Jim Torrance spun a silver dollar on the bar,
ordered his drink and asked:

“Know anyone up around here named Jim Torrance?”

“Howdy, Stranger,” said the bartender. He set forth bottle and glass
and leaned forward conversationally on his elbows. “Jim Torrance?” he
repeated. “Can’t say as I do. What’s he look like?”

“About my size and build,” Torrance told him.

“Who’s he askin’ for, Jurgens?” rapped out a voice from one of the men
lounging over a round table farther down the room. “What’s he want?”

“You’d be sure to ask, now, Sam, wouldn’t you?” grunted Jurgens. “Well,
he’s asking for a man name of Torrance, Jim Torrance.”

“What you want him for, Stranger?” demanded Sam, and got to his feet, a
little dried-up man of fifty or thereabouts, seeming to rattle around
in his blue overalls and faded blue denim shirt like a dried pea in
a weathered pod. He had just about the shrewdest, brightest little
eyes that ever twinkled and gleamed and widened and narrowed in a
man’s face, eyes that just now, and at most times, were as eager as a
six-year-old’s at Christmas time. He came hurrying forward.

“It’s old Sam Pepper,” Jurgens advised Jim Torrance. “The damn’
grasshopper’s got his nose in everybody’s business and knows most
everything.”

Old Sam Pepper, a wisp of a graying man standing something like five
feet and a half in his high-heeled half-boots, peered straight up into
Jim Torrance’s face. All the men in the room had looked the stranger
over pretty thoroughly, as was but natural and customary; strangers
weren’t everyday occurrences in and about Sundown; but no man of them
all regarded him with such frank and thoroughgoing interest as did Sam
Pepper.

He took stock of everything--Torrance’s checkered shirt and neck scarf,
his worn chaps, black and shaggy and dusty, the two crossed belts
dragged low by their twin burdens of guns and cartridges, the worn,
dusty boots beginning to grow lopsided on their high, rocking heels.
But his greatest and gravest concern was the stranger’s face. He made
Jim Torrance out to be tall and lean and gaunt, but as hardy and sinewy
as a man whose muscles and tendons were all fine drawn steel wire;
he stared up into a pair of keen, hard, dark eyes with their trick
of being low-lidded as though always he was squinting at the sun, or
probing under the surface of other men, and a mouth that was set and
stern and somehow grim, a mouth that did not seem ever to have learned
how to smile, a mouth, one would hazard, that knew less how to soften
than to grow savage and cruel.

Sam Pepper was intrigued, but then, as Jurgens had suggested, he was
forever growing curious about affairs not his own and men with whom he
had no dealings. He said a second time, and more briskly, “What you
want him for, Stranger?”

The stranger ignored him as a wolf hound ignores a poodle.

“Seems to me I’ve seen you somewheres,” Sam Pepper hurried on, just to
make way for his second question. “What’s your name, Stranger?”

Then another man spoke up in a deep, throaty voice that sounded
downright jovial in contrast to Sam Pepper’s reedy, rasping utterance,
and Jim Torrance looked down the shadowy room to the speaker, a big,
sturdy, bald-headed fellow a dozen years younger than Sam Pepper and
some two or three times as big.

“Askin’ for Jim Torrance, be you?” he demanded. “Well, me, I know him.
Seen him lately, too. I and him was pardners for a short time, over to
Miller’s Camp. A man about your size; yep, about your build, too.”

Sam Pepper snorted for any to hear. Then in a lowered voice, hardly
above a discreet whisper meant for the stranger alone, he said: “That’s
only Lying Bill talking, Stranger. Lying Bill Yarbo. The truth ain’t in
him and never was. Anything he says goes just the other way round; if
he’d of said he hadn’t never saw or heard of Jim Torrance, well you’d
know they’d been together not ten minutes ago.”

Lying Bill Yarbo shoved back the little poker table and came stalking
forward.

“If you’re of a mind to advertise your business all over town,
Stranger,” he said, for men to hear out on the street a block away--and
they were long blocks in Sundown--“why you just let that feller that’s
talking to you--Sam’l Pepper, his name is, whereas it ought to be
Peeper--know about it and you won’t have to pay to get it published.”
Then a heavy frown dragged at his shaggy, black eyebrows. “What’s he
been saying to you about me? What’s he been whispering?” He balled
up an oversized fist and took another forward stride, whereupon Sam
Pepper whipped back and darted toward the door; and men laughed, and
the bartender, bored as most of his fraternity grow to be habitually,
almost smiled. Jim Torrance’s expression, or lack of the same, was
undisturbed.

“You say you know Jim Torrance?” he said mildly. “Might I ask if he’s
around town, or has been lately?”

Lying Bill Yarbo took a deep, preparatory breath, then began his
rumbling recital.

“Like I say, him and me was pardners over to Miller’s. But that was
quite a while ago, ’bout fifteen-sixteen year. Sixteen year, that’s
what; I’m remembering now. It was when there was that big explosion
the Billings boys was to blame for, a dozen men blowed higher’n kites.
I rec’lec’ how a leg with the boot still on it was blowed in through
the cabin door where me and Jim was having us our dinner. That was Cy
Patten’s leg, and Cy got well and made him another one out of one that
got blew off a piano over to Molly Blaine’s place. And now, the other
day, not more’n say two weeks ago, you could of blowed me over with a
puff of smoke when a feller sings out, ‘Hi, Bill!’ and I look around
and see Jim Torrance. Seems as though--”

Jim Torrance downed his drink and went out; the last words he heard
were Jurgens’, saying, “I never heard tell of that there explosion over
to Miller’s, Bill,” and Lying Bill Yarbo answering crustily, “Shucks,
there’s lots of things you never heard about.” He saw Steve Bordereau
and Murdo standing in the shade where he had left them; the girl had
passed out of sight. He continued along the wooden sidewalk, avoiding
the trap of a broken board for bootheels, and presently heard hurrying
steps behind him. Then Sam Pepper, breathless with haste, his short
legs making two of one of Torrance’s strides, came up with him.

“Seeing how you’re a stranger in town,” said Sam Pepper, “and are
looking for information, I got to warn you that Lying Bill Yarbo--”

“I’ve been warned,” said Torrance.

“I’ll ask folks that I see, folks that might know,” Pepper ran on.
“Who’ll I say is wanting to know? What name, Stranger?”

For a split second Jim Torrance appeared to be considering. Then
he said, in that same somehow incongruously mild tone of his, “I’m
Torrance. Jim Torrance.”

Sam Pepper’s eyes flew wide open, his jaw dropped and he came to a dead
halt. Of a sudden there were a dozen questions he was on edge to ask.
But Torrance stopped a moment and looked at him in a way that dried up
all questions. Then Torrance went on, and Sam Pepper, fairly itching
with a brand-new curiosity, stood where he was and watched.

He saw Jim Torrance go into the one other saloon Sundown boasted--a
squalid, dingy barroom and dance place frequented by the more patently
riffraffian of the community’s population, swarthy breeds for the most
part, with a sprinkling of low-life whites--and still waited. Torrance
came out and Pepper darted in. In short order he ascertained that the
stranger had asked whether a man named Jim Torrance had showed up
there of late. Out Sam Pepper hurried again and saw Torrance go into
the Stage Stop hotel and reappear within two or three minutes. Again
Pepper made inquiries; yes, a stranger asking for a man named Torrance
was just in here. And out Sam popped again, this time to see his latest
and greatest interest in life, his new mystery man, step into the bake
shop. He came out with something in his hand that looked like a pie. No
doubt it was a pie. Just the same, Sam Pepper made sure.

“Yep, it was a pie!” he said under his breath, out on the street again.
And when the newcomer mounted his horse and rode away, carrying an
apple pie, Sam Pepper goggled after him. It didn’t seem to make sense
somehow.

CHAPTER II

Lying Bill Yarbo, the next day, told one of the most intriguing lies of
his Munchausenesque career, in that it was one which later seemed to be
borne out in fact. All this was much to Lying Bill Yarbo’s surprise.

Sam Pepper, that queer combination of curiosity and cowardice, speaking
about the matter in a way he had, since nothing that happened was out
of the circle of his interest and commentary, made an observation which
fitted the case as a cowboy’s new boots fit his Chinese feet. Sam
Pepper said:

“Shucks, it’s ag’in natur’ that any man, lyin’ steady with every breath
he draws for twenty year, won’t make a miscue and blunder into the
outside edges of the truth once in a while. It’s like as if you took a
gun and blazed away a thousand times, and even if you tried not to hit
it you’d spot the bull’s-eye sooner-later. Accidents do happen.”

Lying Bill Yarbo rode into Sundown about noon and was seen--by Sam
Pepper, of course--to rock somewhat unsteadily on his heels, then make
a bee line to Doc Jones’ Drug Store. Sam Pepper sniffed the air like a
hunting dog on a hot scent, and made his own bee line. It wasn’t like
Lying Bill Yarbo to be drunk this time of day, and what did he want at
the drug store anyhow?

Inside, Lying Bill was getting patched up, painted with iodine until
he looked like an Apache on the war trail, hung together with strips
of bandage and doused with Wizard Oil, so that face and hands were all
criss-crossed, doused with forty-rod whisky that soothed what ailed him
and lubricated the floodgates of his speech.

“I was riding up in the hills a piece,” said Lying Bill Yarbo. “I
cut acrost Nigger Crick and went up over the saddle and down into
Desolation Valley, and I seen three fellers down in there that I
knowed. One of ’em was that very same Jim Torrance the feller in town
was asking about yestiddy, and another was a half-breed I used to see
around Tucumcari, and one was another feller; and so I rode down to
pass the time o’ day, and I seen three more fellers that was sorta
hiding in the brush. Quick as a flash I made out what they was up to,
’cause they was getting set to murder another feller. Then them fellers
made out that I’d seen what was going on, and they piled onto me. The
whole six of ’em, being it was six that I counted, and there mought of
been more. And we fit.”

Sam Pepper giggled.

“Most likely they kilt pore old Bill Yarbo, bein’ so many ag’in him,”
he offered humorously.

Lying Bill Yarbo glared him down.

“We fit, like I said,” he said ponderously. “Me, I grabbed one man and
slung him ag’in the crowd, knockin’ ’em all galley-west. And they begun
shootin’ and so did I, and I reckon I kilt some on ’em, and the rest
got enough and run for it. I was that mad by then I’d of kilt ’em all,
only I was sort of shaky and unsteady from fighting so many, all the
same time, and so the living ones escaped.”

“Most likely,” Sam Pepper observed out of the corner of his mouth to
the druggist’s boy, “he fell off’n his horse and rolled down a ten-foot
drop of cliff somewheres, and most likely he wasn’t inside ten mile of
Desolation Valley, and most likely--”

That was as far as Sam Pepper got with his surmisings, for Lying Bill
Yarbo had ears like a lynx and heard every word and doubled his fists
and sort of leaned forward. Sam Pepper skipped to the door and stuck
there, too interested to permit of full flight, too much afraid of
Lying Bill Yarbo to draw closer.

But the tale was told, and, though Lying Bill Yarbo elaborated it and
put in some fancy stitches, nothing of any great import was added.
It was, of course, a lie made out of whole cloth. The truth of the
matter had been expressed unknowingly by Sam Pepper. Lying Bill Yarbo
hadn’t been within miles of Desolation Valley that day, and he had
gotten a bad spill when the young, half-broke horse he was riding shied
at a rock rolling down into a bit of mountain trail. The rider, his
wandering thoughts far afield, had come mighty close to going over a
hundred-foot fall of granite rock instead of a mere ten, and was lucky
to be alive, with no bones broken.

But the oddest part of the whole thing was to follow. Sam Pepper was
right and knew it in his bones; just the same he couldn’t sit still
until he visited Desolation Valley. It was only a dozen miles or so
to the northwest of Sundown, and within an hour of hearing the story
he rode out of town, heading eastward to fool ’em, then circling and
turning toward Desolation. And he came dangerously close to being the
second man to fall off his horse that day, when he found what he hadn’t
the least expectation of finding.

Already, high in the blue air, the turkey buzzards were spiraling.
Sam Pepper won the race from them. He found a man lying dead, arms
outflung, wild black hair hanging straight against bloodless temples, a
neat blue hole in his forehead.

“Why, cripes! I know this feller!” gasped Sam. “I seen him raising
merry hell around Sundown only a coupla days ago. He was looking for
Steve Bordereau, and Steve was out of town right then, and he shot his
mouth off to say some day him or Steve was going to kill each other.
And I’ll bet a man--”

Lying Bill Yarbo, when the news was brought to him, turned as red as a
beet; even that bald and shiny pate of his, usually a pale pink, became
a rich crimson. He swallowed a time or two; his Adam’s apple went
pumping up and down and he seemed to find difficulty in breathing. But
he was not Lying Bill Yarbo for nothing. He began to laugh.

“That’s only one of ’em I kilt,” he proclaimed. “I dug a hole and
buried the rest of ’em. Must of overlooked that feller.”

With much laughter, with men slapping their own legs or the other
fellows’ backs and vowing that Bill Yarbo was the very king of all good
liars, Lying Bill Yarbo himself rode out of town hurriedly and was not
seen for a week.

“Ashamed, that’s what he is,” proclaimed Sam Pepper gleefully. “He’s
gone to hide his old bald head. Most likely he’s that shamed that he’ll
never come back, which would be a good thing for one and all!”

And then--as though Sam Pepper didn’t already have enough on his mind
to put a man into what was locally known as a state or a dither--all
he had to do was climb the high pine hill pretty nearly centering his
ranch, and from it look over to the old Hammond place, all of a sudden
and without his knowledge taken over by a stranger who said that he
wanted to see Jim Torrance--and who, if you asked him, said that he
_was_ Jim Torrance!

“It’s beyant me,” muttered Sam Pepper when he had climbed the hill and
had settled himself on a flat rock whence he could see far and wide.
He saw the stranger going about the small house and barn and bunk
house, pottering like a man at home; he saw the boy Skeeter and the
dozen head of horses, likely looking stock, and the pack mules. “Must
of bought the place,” he speculated. “Wonder how much he paid? Wonder
what he’s up to? Wonder who the kid is? Wouldn’t be his boy; might
be a kid brother. Wonder what makes his face look like it does, like
he was athinking black and mysterious thoughts! I got a notion to go
over--” His spare shoulders twitched and he made a wry face, squinching
up his sharp-pointed nose. “If he is hiding some evil doings, and I
found out--and he kotched me--he’d commit murder as quick as I’d spit
terbaccy juice down a knot hole.”

Meantime the stranger, all unaware of the fact that he was being spied
on whenever Sam Pepper had the leisure--and Sam always had plenty of
leisure when there was something to be nosed out, and nearly always
there was something afoot that invited his investigation--went about
his work on the old Hammond ranch toward making it again what it had
been a long time before, a tidy place to live on. First of all he and
the boy mended fences; then they restored the old corral down by the
barn, and after that they gave their attention to the barn itself.
Those chores done, they did things to the old house. It was an ancient
adobe with a plank shed addition like some noxious excretion that
needed amputation. They tore the shed down and piled the lumber behind
the house against some future use, as firewood perhaps. Then they
carted out a lot of refuse and burned it; they cleaned out the well and
installed a pair of new buckets on a new rope. Hour by hour the place
brightened.

Jim Torrance’s premises were at last invaded by Sam Pepper, who
could no longer resist making an exploratory expedition. He came
over ostensibly to be neighborly but with eyes and ears taking in
everything. It happened that at the moment a red hawk lighted on a pine
top within what Sam Pepper would have described as rifle distance.
Jim Torrance snapped a gun up from his dragging belt and set a bullet
free--just like brushing a gnat away--no more premeditation, no more
precision, you would have said; just an involuntary gesture. Yet it
remained that the red hawk came straight down, a dead fluff of feathers.

“Don’t like ’em,” said Jim Torrance gently, and holstered his gun. He
turned and looked Sam Pepper in the eye exactly as he had done that day
in Sundown. “I’ve got doves around here that I do sort of like. The
hawks bother ’em. Me, I’ve got no use for any sort of birds that go
sticking their beaks into quiet folks’ affairs.”

And he kept on looking at Sam Pepper exactly as he had done in Sundown.

Sam Pepper went home.

As for Jim Torrance, he smiled, if you could call it a smile, and went
into the house. He shed his work clothes and dug some town clothes out
of a canvas roll. He shook them out, brushed them, used a hot stove
lid as an iron and pressed them. He called Skeeter in and said: “Kid,
at last I’ll let you go on your way. Here’s what’s coming to you, with
enough on top of it to buy you board and lodging for a few days. Adios
and luck.”

It was just one week from the day he had arrived in Sundown, just a
week plus a few hours from the time he had overheard Steve Bordereau
saying to Murdo, “I’ll have her upstairs at midnight a week from now.”

Jim Torrance rode into Sundown that night about ten o’clock. It was
a Saturday night. That meant that the small town would be swollen
like a tumor with that virulence which a horde of drinking, gambling,
here-we-go, devil-may-care hell-rousers had the knack of injecting into
an evening when they were at large. With them, cowboys and ranchers
and dry-gulchers and mule skinners and desert rats, up from the Big
Sandy, and the rest of the denizens of the ridges between lowlands and
highlands; the thing to do of a Saturday night was come to town.

They came to town.

When at ten o’clock Jim Torrance looked in at the Stag Horn Saloon it
was upon no such quiet picture as he had mentally photographed that
still afternoon of his first arrival. Now the place was jammed; the air
was blue with cigarette and cigar smoke; a big, new magical-looking
wheel turned out noisy music if you dropped a quarter into it, and
quarters dropped like rain while voices shouted other voices down; and
along the bar, upon which three busy barkeeps slammed down the drinks
and raked in the silver, there was no space for a new invader unless he
scrimmaged for it.

Jim Torrance, shaven and with his hair freshly combed, wearing a
brand-new bandana about his throat, walked through the long room,
looking things over. He kept thinking: “He’ll have her here at
midnight. That’s two hours yet. Upstairs.”

So he had his conventional drink and loafed through the place looking
for its upstairs. He found a staircase, masked, until one looked
sharply for it or knew where it was, by a pair of doors with veilings
over them. As you came in from the street, all you had to do was turn
right, instead of left where the barroom was, buck the doors, go
upstairs and find the room where the wheel spun, where the faro layout
invited, where chuck-a-luck and the rest of the popular games spun
along wide open.

“I’ll poke along upstairs at twelve o’clock,” said Jim Torrance to
himself.

A quirk of bitter humor molded his lips into a half smile that was the
next thing to a sneer, for he thought: “I am like Sam Pepper, getting
the disease known as elongated proboscis. What business is it of mine?”
Just the same he was quietly determined to stick his long nose into the
Bordereau-Sally Dawn affair.

Shortly before midnight he found his way upstairs. On the upper
landing, standing before closed doors, was a thick-bodied, beefy
looking man who challenged him with a long, probing look.

“Looking for somebody?” he asked.

“I want a run for my money,” said Torrance. “I can get it up here,
can’t I?”

The doorkeeper didn’t ask any more questions. The stranger didn’t look
like a tin-horn. Anyhow, ten minutes would show whether he was a cheap
skate or the real goods. He said: “Go ahead, Stranger. Right through
them doors. You’ll find your game.”

Torrance entered a big room, bigger than the barroom downstairs, that
would have surprised him had it not been that the place was so widely
known that he and thousands of others had heard of it from far off.
It was the particular room to give Bordereau and the Stag Horn their
dubious reputations. Elegance, nothing less, was the keynote here. On
top of elegance you had abundance. Whiskies and brandies were of the
best that the Southwest knew, and the Southwest knew its liquor. There
was champagne that didn’t sicken you; and the whiskies and brandies
and wines flowed as from a spigot that aped the purse of Fortunatus.
What was more to the point, you didn’t have to pay for what your throat
yearned for. There was a sort of politeness in the room; your host was
M. Bordereau, and his one desire appeared to be to go to any extreme to
make you feel at home, to make you feel cordially received, to get you
cordially warmed--and put you in the mood to shoot your wad at one of
his gaming tables.

Therefore the beefy man at the doors. It was his job to gauge all
comers by the dollars-and-cents measure. You’d get anything liquid in
the house that you wanted, free, not a cent for it; but you’d leave, at
quitting time, nothing less than a hundred dollars. Maybe a thousand or
ten times that. Steve Bordereau was wearing diamonds.

There were already some forty or fifty people in the room, men
for the most part, though there were a few women, the dazzling,
hit-you-in-the-eye, effulgent type, those adventuresses that the West
drew at that time from all the world.

And there was Florinda.

Steve Bordereau himself, in his long-tailed coat and trousers with
stripes down them and patent leather shoes, was very much in evidence.
He knew everyone by his first name and was a genial host and friend.
He was as smooth as an eel in oil, yet remained as hard as lava rock.
Before them all he was a courtly gentleman with Florinda on his arm;
not ten minutes before he had grabbed her by the hair and slapped her
face and told her, as though she needed telling, what she was. But
before his public he bragged about her.

This part of the establishment had been a gradual, natural growth. At
first there had been just a poker room set aside for those who, when
they wanted poker, wanted high stakes. There were several of them--old
Tom Clark, the mine owner; Gaston Dubordieu, the gambler; three younger
men, Juan Garcia, Walter Voorhees and Dick Hathaway, sons of three of
the biggest cattle kings within a score of miles in any direction--and
twenty miles was quite a step when you did it on horseback. These and
their ilk at times brought others, and Steve Bordereau saw wisdom in
accommodating them. So he had built on the second story, bricks laid on
top of honest adobe, with not only a front but also a back stairway. He
added a roulette wheel and a faro layout and dice and card games, and
he made his regulations to shut out the nickel-shooters and admit only
the dead-game sports.

Further, of late he had added two other luxuries--a deep Turkey-red
carpet and a young lady in evening dress.

“She and the carpet add a nice homey touch,” he said sentimentally.

The young lady--Florinda--greeted the boys smilingly and chatted with
them; she encouraged them in extravagant notions and sat briefly with
them at their tables, dropping in and fluttering away like a butterfly.
She lifted her long-lashed eyes and widened them in horror at pikers’
bets; she clapped her hands when some young fool took the bit in his
teeth and began to plunge.

“And she’s a real lady,” Steve Bordereau boasted of her. “One of the
fine old Spanish family of Valdez y Verdugo. The Señorita Florinda de
Valdez y Verdugo, that’s who she is! The real goods, no gutter-snipe.
Not from Mexico--from Spain. You see, she just happened to be visiting
in Mexico City when all her folks got slaughtered in that Jerez
revolution. The family fortune was swept away, nothing left but the
Verdugo jewels that she’s wearing tonight.” Without stint, he had spent
sixty dollars for the double handful of glass diamonds and rubies and
emeralds.

To Florinda, not ten minutes ago, he had said in one of the private
rooms: “You damn little fool, watch out for the booze tonight. Get
tight just once more and I’ll kick you clean from here to the border
dive where I picked you up, and where that _novio_ of yours will pop a
knife into you like sticking a pig.”

As Jim Torrance wandered through the long room, looking at the games
that were already running, glancing at faces to see whether any were
familiar, and then stood up at the bar, he saw Florinda for the first
time. She was not six feet away and chanced to turn at that moment and
their eyes met.

“You!” she exclaimed.

He stared coldly at her. And Steve Bordereau noted her exclamation and
Torrance’s impassive, masklike face.

Bordereau came forward and explained to Torrance that up here a man did
not have to pay for his drinks. It was all on the house.

“Drink hearty,” he said. “Have a good time, Stranger.”

Jim Torrance set a ten dollar gold coin spinning.

“I pay for my drinks, unless I’m drinking with a friend, or go
thirsty,” he replied.

Bordereau shrugged. To the man behind the bar he said: “This gentleman
is new here, Charlie. Let him have things his way.”

“Sure,” said Charlie, and to Torrance, “What’s your relish, Stranger?”

Torrance had his drink, but out of the corner of his eye he saw
Bordereau signal the girl aside. He couldn’t overhear their words but
thought that he could come pretty close to guessing their burden.
Bordereau would be saying: “Say, you know that man! Who is he?” She
would have to confess that she didn’t quite know.

But Florinda was saying more than that. A shiver twitched at her bare
shoulders as though she were cold. She said rapidly:

“I don’t know who he is, but I am afraid of him! There is something
terrible about him. Did you see how he looked at me?”

“You do know him,” snapped Bordereau.

“I saw him once, only once; that’s all. Down in Nacional where I was
dancing at the place of One Eye Perez where you found me. The way he
looked at me just now, he looked at a man like that that night--and
before the sun came up that man was dead. That is all I know. I swear
it!”

“I wonder!” He looked at her suspiciously.

Jim Torrance amused himself for a while at one of the tables; faro was
his game when it wasn’t poker, but tonight his eye was less for the
card the dealer slid from its rack than for the several doors opening
into the long room. It was full midnight now, and the sullen little
beauty with the smoky eyes, Sally Dawn, was nowhere in evidence. He was
glad, because he wanted to have Steve Bordereau fail to make good his
boast, yet it remained that he was disappointed, too.

Then he saw Bordereau look at his heavy gold watch and hurry out
through a door at the far end of the room; that way was the head of the
back staircase, and also, as Torrance later discovered, a series of
small private rooms--a dressing room, an office, small rooms for poker.
He thought--because Bordereau had looked at his watch: “He’s going to
get her now. He looks smug and somehow like he’d raked in a jack pot.”

He was right. Almost immediately Steve Bordereau returned, and Sally
Dawn came with him. The gambler threw the door wide with a gesture; he
extended a dramatic arm in another wide gesture, ushering her in. Then
a hush fell upon the room as she stood framed in the doorway.

CHAPTER III

Steve Bordereau was a showman of sorts; else he’d never have made the
Stag Horn so widely publicized across hundreds of Southwestern miles.
He knew values and how to emphasize them.

A murmur went up when all eyes were drawn to Sally Dawn. She was pale,
with no rouge on her cheeks, and her lips were scarlet. She wore long
ruby-red earrings--ruby-red but not rubies. No others of Bordereau’s
glass gems adorned her. Her gown was exquisite, costly and in marked
contrast to La Florinda’s flashy one, a beautifully simple thing of
white satin. She carried a large black ostrich-feather fan in her left
hand. Her eyes looked enormous.

“My friends!” sang out a triumphant Bordereau, “I have a new surprise
for you, and here she is! It is Miss Sally Dawn Cannon, and I guess
some of you already know her, the daughter of the late cattle king,
Big Bill Cannon. She has consented to come here to be still another
hostess, like the Señorita Florinda de Valdez y Verdugo, and to be
friendly with all my friends. And to start with, she asks everyone
here to drink her a little toast! Nothing in the house is too good for
tonight, and it comes to you with Steve Bordereau’s compliments.”

Sally Dawn smiled upon them. It was a lovely smile, thought Jim
Torrance, and he thought also, “Well, money can buy most things.”
Bordereau’s announcement was greeted with cheers and hand clappings.
Torrance went on with his faro, playing as though he did not care
whether he won or lost, and so he started winning. He saw Sally Dawn go
straight to the Mexican girl; Florinda showed her beautiful white teeth
in what went for a glad smile of greeting. The two girls spoke together
a moment, Sally Dawn eagerly, Florinda appearing more reserved; perhaps
she was striving for a hauteur to match the proud names Verdugo and
Valdez.

Then men began surging forward, flocking for the most part about the
new girl; in champagne of Bordereau’s providing or their own choice of
liquor they drank her health and happiness. And to Jim Torrance, still
at his faro table, it seemed that she was the gayest of the gay ones;
he thought that he had never seen eyes sparkle and glimmer as hers did.

Then she was swept away by a small party who wanted her at their table,
and La Florinda went her own way with her own friends, hovering with
them over a roulette wheel, and Torrance finished his game, pocketed
his winnings and moved farther down the long room. He stood there
at the end of the bar, his glass twirling slowly between lean brown
fingers, his eyes, always low-lidded, looking lazy, yet secretly
watchful.

He marked the face of every man and woman in the place; he took
stock of winners and losers, of hard drinkers and hard players. When
any newcomer arrived--and men were coming in all the time, the room
filling and overflowing--he saw them. When some went out from time to
time, he took note.

A very few departed early through the front doors, going down the front
stairs and about their business, homeward bound perhaps. Several went
out through one of the three doors set in the wall toward the rear end
of the room. He gathered, without asking, that these were off to play
poker in private rooms. He spotted the men, two of them, who would play
for the house. Perhaps later Steve Bordereau would play for himself.

Again the new girl caught his attention, and his eyes still further
narrowed until they were mere light-flickering slits. She seemed gayer
than ever, eager, electric; he thought he had never heard such bright
laughter. The warmth of color now staining her cheeks might have
resulted, along with the exhilaration gripping her, from the wine that
had flowed so generously.

And then he saw her eyes, and knew instantly that he had her all
wrong. They chanced to meet his across the room--frightened, panicky,
desperate eyes. Whatever reason the girl might have to bring her here,
she was scared half to death.

She had just risen swiftly from a table where she was being made much
of by four men. Steve Bordereau, who had never lost sight of her,
hastened to her side; his hand, firm and agile and powerful, came to
rest on her arm. As the men at the table rose, too, one of them drunk
and leering, Bordereau said cheerfully:

“Go on ahead, boys; we’ll be back with you in two shakes.”

The four went out at one of the rear doors. Bordereau, with his hand
still on the girl’s arm, stooped closer, his face close to hers. His
words, so softly spoken were they, did not carry any farther than he
meant them to carry. Then, though the girl for a moment stood very
stiff, she turned to go with him, out of the room at the rear. The two
passed quite near where Jim Torrance stood at the end of the bar.

The girl said, “That man is a beast, the one who wants to pay me to be
his mascot--”

Bordereau said: “Shut up, you little fool! You’ll do what I tell you!”

She answered, in a queer, strained voice, “You can’t make me do a thing
like that.”

She had pulled back, but they were passing on again.

Bordereau said angrily, “You know I can make you do anything!”

She said, scarcely above a whisper: “I won’t. I’d kill you!”

They went on then. A door opened and closed after them.

* * * * *

“Know a man around here named Jim Torrance?” Jim Torrance asked the
nearest bartender.

“No. Never heard of him.”

Jim Torrance paid for his drink with a silver dollar. As things
happened, he did not wait for his change. Above the noise in the room,
he heard the shot, not loud but clear and eloquent enough. Nor did he
wait to note whether any others heard and marked it too. Two or three
swift, long strides brought him to the door through which the gambler
and the girl had just passed. There was a hallway with another set of
doors on the farther side; a couple of shaded lamps gave their dim,
colorful light. He saw Bordereau and Sally Dawn.

Bordereau had not yet fallen, but had his back against the wall and
appeared to be sliding slowly sideways. The girl had dropped her big
black fan; the only thing she held was a small pistol. There was a
look of horror on Bordereau’s face, a look of horror, almost twin with
it, on hers. Her fingers opened slowly and the pistol clattered to the
floor.

“I have killed him! I am glad! He--”

From her, Jim Torrance looked swiftly at Bordereau again. The man was
down now; he had flung up an arm as he lurched; a hand brushed his
face; Torrance saw the bloodstain there. He started to shrug; what
affair was it of his?

Then he heard a clamor as a door was thrown open against a wall and men
called out and came running. At the same moment he saw the head of the
back staircase.

“Get out of here, quick; on the run!” he commanded. “They’re all
Bordereau’s friends, not yours.”

She didn’t move; she didn’t appear to have heard. He stooped to pick up
the fallen pistol and her black fan; he caught her by the arm and ran
with her to the stairs. They plunged downward together, the girl half
falling, half carried by the strong hand that bore her along. Together
they darted out at the rear of the house.

His one thought was to get her clear until she could have her own
friends at her back, until the Bordereau pack had cooled a bit. He ran
with her to the front of the building where horses were. He meant to
throw her onto a horse, to pile onto another and be off with her that
way. Then he saw the one wheeled rig, a buckboard as lean and light as
a greyhound, with a pole team.

“Yours?” he demanded, seeing that there was but the one team here,
knowing that most men came on horseback, and arguing that she, if she
had dressed at home, would have mussed her dress on a saddle and hence
had come in the buckboard.

She gasped out something, he couldn’t make it out. Well, it didn’t
matter. He swung her up bodily over a wheel to the seat; he ran and
untied the horses; he slipped the reins into her hand.

“Get going, on the run,” he commanded. “I’ll grab my horse and follow.”

His horse was tied only a few feet away. He jerked the tie rope free,
swung up into the saddle--and saw that she had not stirred; there she
sat, a slim, white, rigid figure on the seat. He rapped out again, “Get
going!” and lashed the horses over their rumps with the end of his tie
rope. The horses were off at a run, frightened; the girl began to sway,
then to lean sideways, reminding him of Bordereau settling to the floor.

With the horses running, he spilled out of his saddle to the tail end
of the buckboard, keeping the tie rope still in one hand, leading his
own horse. As he came to the back of her seat he saw that the girl’s
hand lay loosely at her sides; she had dropped the reins and they
were about to vanish over the dashboard. He made a wild grab for them,
caught them just in time--and just in time caught her, too. She had
fainted dead away.

“Here’s hell to pay,” he growled. Never had he had his hands so
filled--with the reins of the runaway team, his own horse’s lead rope,
and now an unconscious Sally Dawn.

He managed to ease her down on the seat, her head and shoulders on his
knee; he gave the lead rope a couple of turns about the guard rail
at the back of the seat, thrust the free end under him, anchoring it
against any but a severe tug by sitting on it while he used both hands
for a fighting second or two, getting the runaway team under control.
Then he looked back through the starlit dark of the night to see
whether they were followed and made out that they were not as yet. He
looked ahead and briefly wondered where he and the girl were headed.
There had been no time, no chance to choose a direction.

They were speeding north, and his ranch lay to the north of Sundown,
so, at the first side road, a wavering, little-used lane through the
pines, he swung homeward. If the confounded girl hadn’t slumped into a
faint on him she could tell him where she lived, where she wanted to go
now; he himself hadn’t the least idea. Now the only thing he saw to do
was carry her to his place; they might not look for her there--and even
a Sam Pepper couldn’t see in the dark.

He kept the horses on the run on the down grades, saving them on the
pulls, letting them blow a time or two. When he pulled up at the side
of the gray and ghostly road where the old dead pine leaned over the
big white rock, the girl stirred and moaned sobbingly and sat up. He
got down, tied the horses in the dark under the pines, put up his hands
to her, and said curtly, “Better hop down.”

“Where are you taking me?” she asked then.

“My place. It’s only a step beyond the gate there. Then I’ll come back
and get rid of this team somehow; they won’t be able to follow the
tracks tonight, but tomorrow they will. By that time I can get you
home.”

She did not stir to get down.

“Why not now?” she asked.

“Suit yourself. But if Bordereau’s dead-- Well, where will they look
first of all for you?”

She put her face down into the shelter of her hands; he stood close
enough to see how she shuddered.

Once again he tried to shrug away all responsibility, yet somehow he
couldn’t quite make a go of it. He didn’t like Steve Bordereau and
he didn’t care much for the gambler’s crowd of friends; further, he
remembered two things--how the gambler had gripped her by the arm, and
how a strange terror had dilated her eyes. He stood a moment looking up
at her uncertainly; then he simply reached up and lifted her down in
his arms.

“Come along with me; I won’t hurt you any. Whatever you do now, you had
better take time to think.”

She slipped out of his arms and answered quickly, “Yes.”

He led the way, opened the gate and showed her the house; it was dark
but the dull gray adobe walls were revealed by the glimmer of the
stars. He waited for her at the open door; he heard her teeth begin to
chatter.

“Step in and I’ll light a lamp; we’ll have no light until the door is
shut.”

With the door shut and a smoky-chimneyed coal oil lamp burning wanly on
a box that served as table, she did not look about her to see what this
bare room was like but lifted her eyes straightway to his; they were no
longer sullen but were bright with burning anguish.

“I killed him,” she said. “I wanted to kill him--and I did.”

“Maybe not,” he told her. “A man doesn’t die every time a bullet from a
small caliber gun hits him.”

“If I did kill him, I can only hope that I won’t live long. If I
didn’t-- Well, I might as well be dead.” And then she demanded: “Why
did you step in? Why are you trying to help me? You don’t even know me.”

“I meant to take you straight to your folks, but you toppled over and
we had to start on the jump, and I don’t know where you live. That’s
why I brought you here--”

“I can’t get his face out of my mind--how he looked when he slumped
down. He-- Oh, God!”

“Look out!” said Jim Torrance sharply. “Don’t you start going to
pieces!”

There was not a chair in the room, so she dropped down in a corner, her
face hidden in her hands as it had been in the buckboard, as though she
were fighting desperately thus to shut out something she could not
bear to look at.

“How far from here,” he asked her, “to your home?”

“It’s not far, just across the hills, but there’s no road.”

“What do you mean?”

“I’d have to go back the way we came, almost to Sundown; the road turns
off there. And I’d be sure to meet them--”

“Just across the hills? We could make it on horseback.”

“Yes.” She stood up. “I’ll go now, right away. My mother is desperately
ill.”

“And you left her to go to the Stag Horn!” His tone was as good as a
slap in her face. He softened it somewhat, however, when he saw the
anguish seeming to burn higher and higher in her eyes, and said: “Well,
your folks will be taking care of her. But about going right now--”

“I haven’t any other folks. There is just Mother, and I think she is
dying. I left her alone with an ignorant, shiftless and pretty nearly
heartless Indian woman. That’s why I must hurry.”

He realized that there was a lot he did not know about this girl. He
asked: “What about your team? It is yours, isn’t it?”

“Yes.” She looked down at her gleaming white gown, soiled and rumpled
now, and set her hands to it as though she wanted to rip it off her
body. “I drove over, so as not to muss this thing! The team? What do I
care--”

“I’m going to ride along with you,” said Torrance, “anyhow until you
sight your house. Now you just wait here while I go saddle a horse for
you; it’s in the pasture, so it’ll be a few minutes.”

“Hurry!” she begged him.

He went first of all to where he had left the buckboard. He swung the
team back into the road, still leading his own horse, and drove on at
a run for a good mile. Where there was a possible though roadless way
down into the dark, timbered canyon, he drove down into it, a winding
way among the trees. There he left the buckboard; the horses, hastily
unhitched and unharnessed, he turned loose, trusting that they’d return
home in the course of time but not in any great haste. After that he
hunted in the buckboard against the mere chance that the girl’s fan or
the gun he had dropped there had stayed with them on their rapid flight
from Sundown; he found neither.

He met Sally Dawn, a slim white satin shape, at the gate.

“Where have you been? I thought you had gone away!”

He told her briefly, then at last went for a horse for her, cinched on
his spare saddle, wondering how the devil she was going to manage with
that dress on, and returned to her.

She managed all right. As a matter of fact she had thought of the
problem before he did and had solved it after a fashion. While he was
away with the team she had found a sharp knife and some string in his
kitchen. With a sort of savage delight she ripped that satin gown fore
and aft so that it hung in two panels like a divided skirt. With the
string she bound the two separate divisions about her legs from ankle
to thigh. When he saw her mount it was like seeing a young page from
some old court.

The way they rode, the girl leading along dim, dark trails, it was but
four or five miles to the old King Cannon Ranch. The first winking
light which she was first to glimpse was, she told him, home. He
spurred to her side and put his hand on her horse’s reins.

“Listen! You said you left your mother alone with the Indian woman.
Well, listen!”

The night was still, and sounds carried far and clearly. There were
men’s voices; there were drumming hoofbeats, still in the distance.
That meant that already there were several men here, others soon to
arrive.

“I don’t care! I’ve got to go to her. They won’t dare--”

“Wouldn’t Steve Bordereau have dared a pretty good deal?”

“He can’t now!” Her voice was brittle. “I’m glad! Now, let me go.”

“No. Keep your hair on. Wait here for me. I’ll ride down, find out how
things stand, and be back before you know it. You wait here!”

He dipped forward in the saddle and shot away, and what he had
commanded her to do she did. There was a quality in his voice which as
much as said, “When I say you’ve got to do a thing, you’ve got to do
it.”

A thin little night breeze blew around her and she shivered, not so
much with cold as with nervous dread. She listened to the hammering
of his horse’s hoofs, and they sounded like far, sinister drumbeats.
She lost sight of him down in a hollow brimming with black night, and
for a little while she stared into the utter dark down there and felt
its symbolism sweep over her like a palpable, drowning tide. When she
raised her eyes and looked straight up at the millions of twinkling
lights bespangling the wide sweep of cloudless sky, they seemed
infinitely farther away than ever before, and as chill as a wintry
morning glinting on frost.

She began to listen for his return long before she heard it. The thing
that put a new dread into her was the slowness with which he was
riding. She told herself: “He’s just saving his horse. He has ridden it
hard tonight. And it’s uphill.”

But when he returned to her and didn’t speak out immediately, she
understood that something terrible had happened. He came very close;
this time, instead of putting his hand on her reins, he put it on her
hand.

“We’ve got to take things the way they come, youngster. In this life,
we don’t deal ourselves all the cards we’ve got to play.”

“It’s my mother!” she gasped.

His hand closed, hard and firm on hers.

“Yes.”

“She is dead!”

“Yes.”

“And I wasn’t there! Let me go now; let me go! Quick!”

“Hold it. Hold it, youngster.” It was he who held her. “You can’t go
now, not right now. There’s a bunch of roughnecks down there that--
Well, I’d rather deal with coyotes. They’re a lot of low-lifes of the
Bordereau crowd. They’re half drunk and mean, and they say-- Well,
they’re talking wild. They won’t stay all night. Let them go first.”

“I don’t care, I don’t care!” She wrenched furiously to break his grip.
“I’m going--”

“Steve Bordereau’s dead,” he said bluntly. “They were talking about it
down at the house.”

“I tell you I don’t care about anything now! She wouldn’t be dead if it
weren’t for Steve Bordereau--he ought to have been killed long ago. Let
me go. You can’t stop me--”

“Can’t I?”

He removed his hand only to scoop her out of her saddle and onto his
own. Then he swung his horse about and turned back along the way they
had come.

CHAPTER IV

The following day had Sam Pepper running around in circles. Pop Smith,
down at the General Store, said, “Sam reminds me of a dog chasin’ his
own tail.” Hank Webber, the stage driver, said, “He’ll have a fit afore
the day’s over.” Lying Bill Yarbo remarked, “He’s goin’ to blow up an’
bust; an’ me, I don’t want to be anywheres near when _that_ happens.”
He put thumb and finger to his nose.

But under the circumstances there was no one--excepting Lying Bill
Yarbo of course--who really censured the inquisitive little man for
his state of excitement. Things had happened, the sort of things which
were bound to interfere with Sam Pepper’s proper attention to his own
victuals and drink and everyday affairs.

Sam Pepper fairly danced up and down.

“It all begun with Sally Dawn Cannon being at Bordereau’s gambling
room! Her! What do you s’pose made her go to a place like that? All
dressed up, they say, like a queen, in white silk with diamonds and
ever’thing. Why wasn’t I there? And then look what happens. She kills
Steve Bordereau! Kills him! Her! What about that? _Why?_ What made her?
And then where’d she go? Talk about mysteries! Just vanished--poof!
Like that. And that ain’t half of it!”

No, that wasn’t half of it. Sam Pepper was all over town, out of town,
back to town, everywhere; he must have asked ten thousand questions
that day. He said over and over:

“Sally Dawn’s mother died last night, while all the rest of hell was
popping, and I want to know why. And most of all, tell me this: Can a
dead woman walk? The old woman’s dead body’s vanished, too, ain’t it?
How in hell? Where? _Why?_ A woman dies and her body vanishes, and all
you lunkheads do is squat and let things happen and don’t even try to
find out about ’em!”

So tremendously did all these occurrences obsess him that for the
moment he lost all interest in Jim Torrance, and so failed of coming
in contact with the one person who, if by any chance he had cared to
do so, could have set Sam Pepper right all along the line. For Jim
Torrance was at home all day, pottering around his ranch and letting
his thoughts travel almost as far afield as curious Sam’s.

Last night he had prevailed, at first by physical strength and then
by the suasion of cool logic, upon a girl in the grip of such frenzy
as came close to making her into a mad thing. She screamed at him
until he shut off her screams with a hard hand; she fought, scratching
and pummeling and biting. Until she wore herself out, she evinced a
strength surprising in such slender feminine shapeliness. But in the
end she melted, exhausted, in his arms, and he talked with her, and
after a while she listened.

“It’s tough, but you’ve got to take it. Don’t you suppose other folks
have had to take it, no matter how tough? Your mother, in her time,
your own kids in their time, if you ever have any.”

“I won’t! I never will! Life is so ugly, like a big fiendish brute,
like a gorilla. I hate it!”

“Life’s all right,” said Jim Torrance, sounding vastly indifferent.
“It’s sort of like taking a trip through the woods; you’ve got your ups
and you’ve got your downs, all kinds of steep places and level places,
too; and deserts after you pop out of the shade, and sun and rain and
nice little sections of both heaven and hell.”

“It’s cruel and merciless, and it’s vile.”

“You knew your mother was a mighty sick woman; you knew she had to die
before long--”

“I might have saved her! That was why I let Steve Bordereau make me do
things I hated. He--”

“Never mind Steve Bordereau now. I’m talking about your mother. She is
dead, and you can’t help that. You can go down to the house where she
is if you want to; I won’t hold you back any more after you’ve had time
to think. Only I’ll tell you what’ll happen if you go now. There’s a
tough bunch hanging around, and they’re all Bordereau bums; and they’re
half drunk, some of ’em, and the rest are more so. They’ll grab you;
they’ll yank you off to Sundown or somewhere. God knows what they’ll do
with you, but you could be sure of one thing. By the time you got back
home, if you ever did, your ma’d be buried somewhere. Likely enough
you’d never even know where.”

He had set her down at the base of a big pine. Slowly she slid down
close to the ground; she lay there, flattened against the earth; he
couldn’t hear a sob from her then and it was too dark for him to see
how she writhed.

He waited a while, then spoke emotionlessly.

“I’ll go down to the house again pretty soon. They won’t pay much
attention to me, as why should they? They won’t stick around all night.
There will be only the Indian woman left. I’ll scare her off. Then you
can come.”

* * * * *

Late that night it was Jim Torrance who dug the grave on the knoll back
of the house near that other grave, already six years occupied by the
former cattle king, Bill Cannon. He found mattock and shovel in the
tool shed, and some planks. And it was Jim Torrance who, just before
daylight, bore in his arms a thin, wasted figure, blanket-enwrapped.
All had gone; none had any thought of the dead woman except the Indian
woman, and she had been glad to flee the place when Torrance gave her
her chance. The girl had had her vigil on her knees by her mother’s
bedside while Torrance was digging. She did her weeping alone; when he
came for her she stood up and helped him. She said, when they came to
the knoll:

“I don’t want anyone to know even where she is. They were so cruel
to her. I mean Bordereau and Murdo and those men you say were here
tonight.”

So they replaced the dry sod over the unmounded grave; they scattered
pine needles over it. Torrance even dug up a couple of small bushes and
planted them on an already pretty nearly obliterated rectangle.

“And now?” said Jim Torrance. “What about you?”

“I don’t know. I don’t care. Oh, I’ll go away.”

“Where? Friends?”

“Anywhere. Friends? No. I haven’t anyone. I don’t want anyone.”

“I see.” He rolled a cigarette; rolled and rolled it until it was as
smooth and hard as a lead pencil.

“I haven’t thanked you--”

“Don’t.” He kept on rolling that cigarette of his. Then he cocked an
eye at the eastern horizon. “It’ll be sun-up real soon.”

“Yes. I must hurry. While it’s still dark. I’ve got to slip away as
though--as though I were a murderer!” She broke into a shrill, sobbing
laughter.

“Slam the brakes on,” he said. He lighted his cigarette, then held it
before his moody eyes, studying the red glow of its burning end.

“You have been mighty good to me,” she said. “You don’t know me; I
don’t even know who you are. Why?”

“Why what?”

“Why have you gone out of your way, gone to so much trouble to treat me
like--like a friend?”

“I don’t like Steve Bordereau,” he said, clipping his words short. “I
don’t like Murdo, his side-kick.”

“I see.” And she added, her own words clipped as short as his and
shorter with their bitterness, “It was Clark Murdo first, Steve
Bordereau next and working with him, who ruined us.”

“You haven’t answered me,” said Jim Torrance, and didn’t seem
interested in her relations with Bordereau and Murdo and her sequential
opinions of them. “Now what?”

“I’ve told you--”

“Only it won’t work.” He flipped his cigarette away, then strode to
where it had fallen, to grind it out under the toe of his boot. “I
listened to the men talking at the house before they drifted. Me, being
a Johnny-come-lately, I don’t get it all. But I do get this: Maybe
they won’t string you up the way they’d handle a man--but maybe, too,
there are things a girl like you would hate just about as bad. They’re
plugging all the roads. You try to skip and they’ll get you.”

“It’s Clark Murdo,” she said angrily. “That’s who it is. If Steve
Bordereau were alive, it would be Bordereau. But with him dead”--she
said it as steadily as though she were not remembering--“it’s Clark
Murdo.”

He lifted his shoulders as much as to say, “What’s that got to do with
me?” He reached for his Durham bag, then changed his mind and pulled
his hat off to run his brown fingers through his thick black mane of
hair.

“You’ll come along with me,” he said. “Back to my place. I’ll get you
away, clear, from there. Let’s get going.”

“I can’t understand--”

“You don’t have to understand. Anyhow, there’s nothing that wants any
understanding. You’re free, white and--you’re grown up.” She must be
eighteen or nineteen or a barely possible twenty; at that ripe age a
girl was a woman. “I’m asking you to come along. If you don’t want to,
remember the road’s open both ends.”

She came along. She was half dead with stress, grief and weariness. At
the house she had kicked off that hated white satin gown and donned
riding breeches and boots. She forked her horse the way he did, and
they rode.

They rode through the dark under the pines, as silent and dark within
themselves as the black pines were. They came up to the top of a thinly
timbered ridge and into the wan glow of a new day, two self-contained
black silhouettes against a pale-blue wall glinting with fading stars.
And when the first roseate flush crept into the lower sky they returned
to Jim Torrance’s new ranch.

He made coffee, fried bacon, stirred up flapjacks and presented them as
brown as October acorns. She wouldn’t eat, she couldn’t--but she did.
He said:

“I’ve just moved in here. It’s still mostly like a pigpen. But I’ve got
some clean blankets. You lie down; maybe after while you’ll get some
sleep.”

He slammed the door after him and concerned himself with various ranch
chores which kept him near the house. Most of the time, under his
low-drawn hat brim, his eyes were watchful. He saw her when, about four
hours later, she came to the door. Before she could get well into the
open he bore down upon her.

“Get back inside. I’ll tell you a thing or two.”

First to tell her was something which she already knew but needed to
ponder. Sam Pepper’s ranch was adjoining, and Sam had developed the
habit of going atop a hill to spy on the newcomer.

“I had a skinny kid named Skeeter helping me,” he said. “He’s gone
now, but most likely nobody noticed. You’ll find some of my old clothes
in that back room; there’s a pack needle and thread. You can make ’em
into the sort of misfits Skeeter wore. From a distance you’d look
enough like him. There’s an old hat of mine in there too. All you got
to do is just be a spindling, gawky boy; that ought to be easy.”

She didn’t say anything.

Later Jim Torrance saw several men riding along the road in front of
his place. They passed on and out of sight. Presently they came riding
back. He said to himself, “They found the buckboard.”

This time they turned in at his gate, and he met them on the wheel
track that served as a rutted road.

“Howdy,” said Jim Torrance.

“Where’s the Cannon girl?” said one of them, a skinny man like a hungry
coyote. “Seen anything of her?”

“Who?” asked Torrance.

“The Cannon girl. King Cannon’s kid. She killed Steve Bordereau last
night, grabbed all the loose money she could get hold of and made a
get-away.”

“You don’t say,” murmured Jim Torrance.

They looked at him shrewdly. One of them, a gimlet-eyed, lanky young
hellion, said sharply:

“You was in town yourse’f. You know all about it. She headed out this
way. We found her buckboard. Where’s she at now?”

Torrance’s shrug at its best, as now, was eloquent.

“Me, I’m a stranger in these parts. I’m up here alone, save for the
kid over yonder,” and his gesture indicated a slim, slight figure on
a hill nearly a mile away working at a fence. “If you think we’ve got
the girl hid up our sleeves, look for her.” His gaze, as stern as an
eagle’s, came back to their faces. “A flock of grown men trying to run
down one lone girl? You make a man laugh.”

“Got any meanin’ back o’ that, Stranger?” demanded the sharp-eyed,
lanky man.

For a moment Torrance appeared to consider the matter. Then he gave
them a second shrug and strode away, going off to the corral, which
he, like the slim, slight, distant figure at the fence, was making a
pretence of mending. He knew that in the house they’d find no trace of
her; he himself had seen to that.

He saw them when they came out. They stood a while talking among
themselves; then they went out to the barn, passing quite near where he
was. He gave no evidence of paying them the slightest attention, but
none the less he noticed when they came to a halt and looked across
the fields to the hilltop where the solitary, unhidden figure was. He
knew, too, how her heart was pumping then under that old ragged shirt
of his which he had made her put on for the masquerade. In that, in old
hacked-off trousers of his and his worst hat, she looked as little like
the Sally Dawn Cannon he had seen in a white satin dress at Bordereau’s
as a scarecrow looks like a crescent moon. They might decide to take
time off for a word with the “kid.” Well, she knew her part. If she saw
them start her way, she was to climb into the saddle of the horse tied
to a fence post, to ride leisurely over the brow of the hill--and then
to dig her spurs in for all she was worth.

They went on into the empty barn. Torrance heard them talking in
lowered voices before they came out. Again they looked over to the
hilltop where the figure of what was supposed to be Skeeter, the kid
Torrance had brought along to help with the horses, was busier than
ever at the fence.

“Maybe the kid’s seen her?” said one of the men, looking at Torrance.

He got a third shrug.

“Maybe,” said Jim Torrance.

The men then went away. But they stopped before they got to the gate to
call back:

“Sorry we bothered you, Stranger. Guess she didn’t come this way after
all.”

Any man with half his wits about him could have seen through that
studied remark as through a clean windowpane, and Jim Torrance wasn’t
missing anything obvious today. He told himself thoughtfully: “They’ll
be back about dark, or maybe one of them will stick around, hid in the
pines. They know damn well she did come this way.”

He kept busy another hour at the corral, then went into the house for
ten minutes, smoking and letting time pass. After that he saddled a
horse, got a crowbar, shovel and hammer, and rode lazily across the
fields to lend a hand at fence mending. The girl, watching him coming,
turned frightened eyes upon him.

“They’ve gone?”

“Gone, sure. Not far, though. And they’ll be coming back.”

“You mean--”

“Yes. They found the buckboard where I ditched it, and back-trailed
this far. They’re not fools--or if they are, they’re not plumb fools.
I’ve a notion anyhow one of them is watching us now.”

She shivered. She said faintly:

“I’m afraid. What will they do to me? What am I going to do?”

“Keep right on mending fence for a spell. You know these folks better
than I do. Does it mean much to you, one way or another, if they get
their hands on you?”

Her shiver now was a shudder. He was glad of that, glad that she
realized what she might expect. She said all in one breath, “I’d rather
be dead!”

He helped her set a post straight and began tamping the earth about it.

“I’ll get you out of this--if you want to go with me.”

“Yes! Yes, I do! Oh, you are so-- But _why_? Why do you do all these
things for me?”

The shrug she got from him was worth all the three he had bestowed on
the men seeking her. He said:

“Pretty soon I’ll go back to the house. You’ll keep on here, working as
hard as you can. But keep an eye open for me. When you see me mosey out
to the barn, you take your time, pile on your horse and ride slow and
lazy-like along the top of the hill, heading south. That will bring you
in ten minutes down into a hollow where you’ll cut into a trail. Turn
north there and keep straight on for about three-four miles, where the
trail forks and there’s a spring. Wait there. You won’t have to wait
long. I’ll be with you.”

Her eyes had been lowered while he spoke; now there was a flutter of
her lids, and then her eyes, opened wide, looked up at him wonderingly.

“You haven’t even told me your name,” she said, as though that mattered.

“Torrance. Jim Torrance.”

“I’ll do just what you say.”

So in a little while, with few more words spoken, he left her. She,
though her overtaxed body trembled, kept on at her intrinsically
useless toil. He, pottering about house and barn and corral, kept an
open eye. He saw Sam Pepper come out at his favorite vantage point, and
was relieved rather than discomfited, for seeing what he knew must be
there was easier on the nerves than just fancying it. Also, just once,
he caught a glimpse of a figure skulking among the pines and knew it
for that of the gimlet-eyed young hellion.

“Now we know,” muttered Jim Torrance. “And knowing is better than
guessing, any day.”

He bode his time until the sun was red and flattening down by the
western hilltops. Then he gave the signal which he knew King Cannon’s
daughter had so long and anxiously awaited. He did not turn his head
after that to see what response she made. He rode down the wheel track,
out through the gate and toward Sundown. He rode slowly until he had
passed the first timber-masked turn in the road; then he swerved off
into the wood and began circling through it. In twenty minutes or so
he would strike back into the trail the girl was to have taken. Down in
the hollow it would be dusky then; no one should see him come up with
her.

CHAPTER V

“Where are you taking me?” was the first thing she said. Then, ashamed
that she should always be thinking of herself, she added hurriedly:
“But you! What about your ranch? Your horses? Who will take care of
them? Or are you coming right back in an hour or so?”

“We’re going up into the mountains,” he told her. “No chance down the
other way where they’ll be on the lookout for you. They’d think nobody
would tackle the mountains now.”

She knew what he meant. It was late October; the days had been full
and ripe with sunshine, but there was in the air the bitter sting of
winter. And when winter came, spring could be very far behind. A sudden
storm would choke the mountain passes with snow.

Apprehensively, as though the heavens could assure her, she looked up
at the sky. Just now it had been a clear, shiny blue, but in the last
few minutes a film had crept over it.

“Yes, it’s apt to snow before morning,” he said indifferently. “We’d
better be on our way, hadn’t we?”

“It’s going to storm. If not tonight, then surely tomorrow or next day.
And can we ever hope to get through to the other side? The passes are
up ten thousand feet!”

“Sure,” he said. “Sure. Let’s ride.”

And so they rode.

Together, they were aloof--she because of her fear, fear of what might
be following and fear of him, the unknown; he because of a strange,
baffling indifference. Why, she kept asking herself, _why_ did he
succor or seem to succor her? She could not at any step make him out.
Maybe he, like the others, was out to drag her down. She did not know.
She only knew she did not want to think of it. Without his aid she was
utterly lost. She merely took the one chance, the one open trail. It
might come to a dead end, to a frightful dead end, but it offered her
the one chance, and King Cannon’s daughter took it.

Dusk thickened so fast that darkness, like a black blanket, dropped
down over their heads within the first half hour. Still, looking up,
one could see the frail light clinging like a gossamery mantle to the
mountain tops--and she chose to look up. She saw the first star and it
heartened her.

“Know your way through the mountains?” he asked her, abrupt, out of a
long silence.

“Not very well. It’s been such a long time--not since I was a little
girl-- No, I don’t!”

“Neither do I!”

Then he chuckled. That, like the star, somehow put hope into her. When
a man chuckled-- It was like a boy whistling. It was too dark to see
his face, so she could forget the sinister look of it. She gripped the
horn of her saddle with both hands, clung on tight--and inwardly prayed
to a merciful God.

Neither spoke again until they came high up on one of the ridges that
flowed down from the loftier mountains, and they stopped to blow the
horses. Then the girl, feeling strangely light-headed and fearless and
utterly indifferent of fate, said unemotionally:

“The storm is sure to catch us. I suppose we’ll starve and freeze to
death.”

“We won’t starve,” he said, matter-of-fact about it. “I’ve got a food
pack along, you know. And maybe you noticed the extra blanket thickness
under your saddle? Extra, doubled blankets there, and under mine, too;
so we won’t freeze.”

“You’d thought of all these things!”

“Sometimes it pays to think a couple of jumps ahead,” said Jim Torrance.

“I’ve tried to! I couldn’t. I--I can’t now!”

“Sometimes,” said Jim Torrance, “it pays to do just what you’ve got to
do--sail ahead and take on your thinking when you can. Let’s ride some
more.”

He led the way and she followed, because it seemed to her that
everything had gone out of her, leaving in her breast no will of her
own. At every forward step into the ever darkening wilderness her fears
mounted, yet like a chip borne along on a black unseen tide she went
the way the tide commanded.

Within a couple of hours they came as straight as a string to a little
long-deserted cabin neither of them had ever heard about. Whether they
were led by chance, by the instinct which guides the wanderer through
the proper mountain passes, or by a power she had prayed to, they did
not ponder. After all, their horses were largely responsible; in the
dark they had followed a trail along the bottom of a vast canyon and
had struck into the continuation of that trail across a timbered upland
flat. Torrance’s horse came to a dead stop in front of the cabin before
either of them saw it.

They went in and he made a fire in a wreck of a rock fireplace.

“It’s early yet, but we can’t see what we’re doing,” he said. “So we
stay here over night and step along at daybreak.”

He went out to care for the horses and presently came back with his
blankets and food pack. She was crouching by the fire, head down, her
face in her hands, her hair down about her shoulders.

“Hungry?” he asked.

“No. I couldn’t eat.”

It was a small one-room place. He arranged her blankets on a strip
of canvas in a corner near the fireplace and put his own down in an
opposite corner.

“Scared?”

“Yes,” she told him, and looked up then, her eyes full on his. There
was a shadow of fright in her eyes, yet somehow they seemed to remain
fearless.

He slipped a gun out of its holster and held it out to her.

“Sleep with that in your hand. You’ll get a better rest.”

She shook her head. “No. I have shot one man, God forgive me. I’ll
never do it again.”

He slid the gun back into its place, saying lightly: “Bordereau had it
coming to him. Don’t let a little thing like that ride you. Good night.”

“Good night,” she said faintly, and went to her corner to lie down and
tuck herself into her blankets.

It was bitter cold that night, with the wind howling from midnight on,
and putting its fingers like icicles through a hundred cracks in the
cabin walls. Jim Torrance kept the fire going, bringing in dead wood
for which he had groped in the dark under the pines. When dawn came it
was a pale, chill dawn; the ground was white with snow but no snow was
falling.

Their breakfast, though the fire served them, was sketchy. The best
part of it was the steaming black coffee made in an old tin can. When
he brought the horses up she said, “If they come this far they can
follow our tracks.”

He didn’t say anything but led the way, steering for a high notched
pass in the mountains some miles ahead. On the more gentle slopes they
rode swiftly; for the most part the climbing was slow and laborious.
The sun rolled up, red and genial, and dissipated some of the morning
chill. But soon thereafter a sharp wind began blowing and a thin gray
film spread widely across the sky and they saw the gossamery snow
wraiths swirling about the higher peaks.

“Our tracks won’t last long,” he said to her over his shoulder. “It’s
coming on to snow again.”

She was glad; even now, as through her troubled sleep last night, there
was always the haunting dread of a pack of men, like wolves, hunting
her down. She had never gotten far enough to think what they would do
with her, whether they’d hang her high to some pine tree, as they’d
certainly do with a man, or-- But just the thought of their hands on
her had grown into a nightmare. And now, if God sent His white snow to
cover the earth, she was free!

But when the snow did come and their faint tracks were lost for all
time, her moment of exultation was short. For the cold penetrated,
biting to the bone, and the mountains grew at every step more rugged
and cold and inhospitable. The mountains grew inimical; rather they
had always been that way, but she had never thought about it until
now. They crushed and killed when they could, which was often enough.
Men had their way down in the valleys and foothills, making things
over--but let them try their puny hands up here! The stern old mountain
straight ahead of them was now as it had been a hundred, a thousand,
ten thousand years ago; august, it was an enemy entrenched behind its
towers. Nor was it merely passively inimical; at times it poured down
torrents of stone and gravel in what folk called landslides, which
buried deep the intrepid invader of its kingly solitude. Itself, never
stirring, was like a general directing devastating forces. On a day
like this it was a simple matter to feel that old mountain’s stubborn
hostility.

“It’s going to kill us,” she said. “It’s going to mash us like a worm
someone steps on.”

“You’re all on edge,” said Jim Torrance, and they rode on.

The skies thickened; the snow came down at first in chilled pellets,
then in fluffy feathers that clung to their shoulders and knees and
whitened the ground. Good-by to tracks now!

So for a little while both were content; nothing could be more welcome
than a flurry of snow to shut the gate in the face of any possible
pursuit. But within another hour, as they climbed together, it became
obvious that they had to do with something altogether different from
any mere light sifting-down of playful snowflakes. The wind burst
storming through a high pass and flung hard frozen pellets in their
faces. They spurred on; they came swiftly into a more sheltered region,
but here the snow was falling so heavily that the air was gray and
thick with it. This, then, was not just the advance notice that winter
was on its way; it was winter itself, lionesque and raging.

“You see, I was right,” she said, when they stopped a moment in the lee
of a sheltering cliff. “The mountains and the storm are allied against
us. It will grow dark, we’ll be lost--there’ll just be smooth white
mounds in a day or two for markers, and we’ll be under them.”

“You don’t sound like you cared much.”

“You don’t care either. I could tell when I first saw you.”

But he shook his head, flicking snow right and left from his hat brim.

“You’re dead wrong. I’ve got me a few jobs to do first. And one of them
is to get you out of this. Let’s poke along.”

“You _are_ Jim Torrance?”

“That’s what they told me when I was a little shaver. Why?”

“There’s been a lot of talk about you; I suppose you know that. I
heard men talking at Steve Bordereau’s place. They said that you came
looking for a man named Jim Torrance, and that that’s what you call
yourself.”

“Men say lots of things, don’t they?” he said lightly.

“Let’s poke along,” rejoined Sally Dawn.

* * * * *

Hours later--hours of floundering through already accumulated
snowdrifts in the higher passes with scarcely a word spoken, head-down
hours buffeting the storm--the two came to a spot where it seemed they
could go no farther. Iron-flanked mountains, lifting their naked fronts
high above timber line, seemed to constitute an impassable barrier; and
so heavy were the low skies, so thick the air with storm, that dark was
already on its way long before its appointed time. The two wayfarers
came to a halt; their knees brushed as their horses pressed close
together for warmth and the feel of companionship.

“All I know of this man’s country,” said Torrance, “is from a few words
of hearsay that I didn’t pay much attention to at the time. We can’t be
very far from Pocket Valley, and we’re headed right as far as general
direction goes.”

“Pocket Valley is the first place they’d look for me,” said the girl,
“if they ever guessed we’d headed this way at all.”

“Sure. But we needn’t go right into the Valley at first. The man who
told me about it said something about the old Red Shirt Mining Camp on
the ridge above Pocket.”

“The bottom fell out of it years ago. My father was interested up there
when-- There’s not a soul there, now, especially at this time of year.”

“That’s what I meant. Some of the old shacks are still standing, I
reckon. We could hole up there a day or two. I could make my way in and
out of Pocket for supplies.”

“If we can ever find our way!”

“Sure we can.” She couldn’t be altogether certain, but thought that he
was smiling ever so slightly, and that the smile was quite unforced, as
he added, “You see, we’ve got to!”

So they rode on, riding this way and that on the steepening slopes,
finding a way where none seemed to be, climbing higher and higher in
order to attain those vantage points which afforded best views across
the broken country and down into any such regions as might prove to be
Pocket Valley. They hurried all they could, running a race with the
swiftly advancing night. Sudden dark overtook them on one of the high,
lonely, storm-battered ridges, in as unlikely a place for a camp on a
night like this as could be imagined; and when on the whistling wind
there was borne the dismal howl of a hungry timber wolf, the girl’s
shoulders twitched with something more than cold, and the man admitted
to himself that things could be far better and cheerier. But he said
steadily enough: “We’ll make out. We’ll find shelter under a cliff.
We’ll get through the night, and in the morning we’ll find Pocket
Valley in two shakes. It ought to be just over yonder to the northeast
and only a few miles off. If it hadn’t got dark so early--”

“Look!” she exclaimed, and grasped his arm in her eagerness. “A light!”

His hand gave hers a good hearty squeeze; at the moment both were
unconscious of their involuntary gestures. He, too, glimpsed the light,
weak and wan and seeming far away, somewhere in the black void beyond
and far below them.

“It’s the settlement down in Pocket Valley,” he said with assurance.
“What we see is the lights shining out of windows. So we must be on the
ridge we were heading for, and the old camp must be so close that we
could throw a rock and hit it.”

“If we could only see it! But it’s so dark!”

“We’ll take it slow now; we’ve got some sort of trail under foot; our
horses will take us right. And if we don’t have any luck, well we can
get down to Pocket in no time at all.”

He led the way and she pressed along close behind him, not to lose him
in the thick night. Twice his voice was hurled back to her by the wind,
but she could not make out his words. Then she almost bumped into him;
he had stopped and was dismounting.

“We’re there!” he called triumphantly. “Look sharp and you’ll see a
cabin of sorts; it’s so close you could almost reach out and pat it
with your hand. We’ve just passed another. Light down and we’ll take
stock of our night’s quarters.”

Stiff with cold and weariness she slid down from her saddle; his hand
was out to steady her. Then he shoved a sagging door open and she
stumbled into the cabin’s pitch-black interior.

“Wait a shake,” he said. “Here are some matches. See what it’s like
inside. I’ll tie the horses and you look around. If it’s all right,
we’ll stay here. Or I can poke into one of the other shacks. I’ll be
back with you in a jiffy.”

Their cold fingers fumbled together as he handed her a half dozen
sulphur block-matches. He moved a few steps away in quest of a tree to
tie the horses to, lest, seeking shelter from the storm, they wander
off. Almost immediately he returned to meet her at the door, and to
hear her excited whisper:

“We’re not alone up here! There’s a light in one of the other cabins; I
saw it through a back window, and saw a man moving about. Do you think
it is some of the men from Sundown, looking for me? They might have
ridden ahead and waited here.”

“Did you strike a match?”

“No. I was just trying to--my hands were so cold--and I saw the other
light.”

He went with her to the little window. Fifty or perhaps a hundred yards
away was the other cabin; it, too, had a small square window, and
through this shone glimmeringly the pale light cast by a candle or a
glow from a fireplace. Presently he, too, saw a figure moving across
the window; he couldn’t see at all clearly, but it seemed to him that
the fellow was gesturing as a man might if talking with someone else.

“Of course it might be anybody,” said Torrance, “but the chances are
it’s some lone crazy prospector and nobody from Sundown at all. Just
the same I’d better step over and take a look-see from close up. And
no matter who it is, I think we’d better stick here for the night. We’d
have a devil’s own time getting down to Pocket, and when we got there
we’d be pretty sure to run into someone that knows about Bordereau. I
won’t be long.”

“I’m coming with you!”

“Fair enough. Let’s step.”

So again they went out into the storm to grope their way toward a light
which for her might have the least or the greatest significance. They
went boldly, since the shrieking wind blotted out any sound they made
and since they need have no fear of being seen. They drew close to the
lighted window. At one end of the room a candle-end on a box, stuck in
its own grease, was guttering out; it left the farther end of the room
in wavering gloom. They saw clearly the man who had been moving about
so restlessly and who now stood still; they made out indistinctly the
form of another man lying on a corner bunk. The two were talking, but
not a word was to be overheard. It seemed that the man standing was
taking orders; that he didn’t like them; that none the less he was
accepting them.

Sally Dawn gasped out, her lips close to Jim Torrance’s ear:

“They’re after me! It’s Clark Murdo, Steve Bordereau’s pardner! I can’t
see who the other man is but it’s bound to be another of Bordereau’s
men. What are we going to do?”

“Let’s get back to our cabin,” said Torrance. They turned away but he
stopped and swung about and seemed tempted to linger. “No use,” he
muttered. “That candle will be out in a minute. I’d give my hat though
to see that other man’s face. I’ve got me a notion, Sally Dawn! I sure
have!”

“What? What is it?”

He hesitated, then said roughly:

“No; I’m crazy, I guess. Come on, let’s get under shelter.”

“But can’t you see--”

“No. Neither can you. It’s too dark to see anything. Maybe daylight
will tell us something.”

They made their retreat as hurriedly as they had advanced. Once she
spoke, saying in a mystified voice:

“I wonder who that other man was? I can’t understand Clark Murdo being
bossed like that. And he was being ordered about, wasn’t he?”

“He sure was; he didn’t like it but was taking it. And that’s what gave
me my notion.”

But beyond that cryptic statement he would not go.

CHAPTER VI

Torrance brought in a saddle blanket which he fastened snugly over
their window and then with splinters of wood from floor and walls he
made a tiny fire on the rock hearth, purely for the sake of a little
light in which to explore the premises. The place reeked of long
desertion and was as bare as Mother Hubbard’s cupboard, yet walls and
roof were tight and sturdy. There was a rear door that led into a
dugout some ten feet square.

“I’m going to bring our horses in,” he said. “The dugout will house
them where nobody’s going to find them unless we get found first. And
long before morning their tracks will be wiped out.”

The horses entered the cabin willingly enough, and, though they sniffed
and snorted when once inside, were at last coaxed and threatened into
the dugout.

“Now,” said Torrance, “we’ll eat the rest of our larder, make up our
beds the way we did last night and call it a day.”

“A day! It’s been a year, hasn’t it?”

But she smiled as she said it, a faint and quivering and altogether
uncertain smile, yet one not without its courage. And she added, “We’ve
at least a few bites of food, but our poor horses--”

“Each one gets a double handful of grain,” he assured her, and again
she thought, “He thinks of everything!”

He lifted a corner of the blanket over the window to peer out, and
reported:

“Our neighbors’ house is dark. Mr. Murdo and his friend have gone to
sleep by now, and you and I are going to build up our fire and keep it
going until nearly morning; there’s not one chance in a million of a
ray of light or a spark giving us away. What’s more, they haven’t the
vaguest notion anyone’s about, or they’d have covered their own light.
I stumbled over a dead pine when I was leading the horses; I’ll have
plenty of wood before you’re ten minutes older.”

“I’m going to help you,” said Sally Dawn.

“Look here, you’re tired and--”

“Have it your way,” she said, and he went out and closed the door--and
she opened it and followed close at his heels. She heard him chuckle.

They built up their small fire and crouched before it and got warm
and began to yawn. She lay down in her corner and stared up at the
dimly lit rafters and then looked out of the corners of her eyes at
him, still squatting before the fire, and wondered. It was hard to
read anything in that dark face of his, especially by so treacherous a
light; the faint flicker of the flames at times seemed to reveal only a
grim sternness that was twin with brutality, at other times to soften
the features so that they appeared touched by a smile that had actually
in it a hint of tenderness. She fell asleep, with Jim Torrance still
motionless at the hearth.

* * * * *

She awoke with a start and sat up rubbing her eyes and staring about
her. The room was ablaze with light and her first thought was that the
cabin was on fire. Then she saw him standing there, looking down at her
in that quizzical way of his, half smiling and half frowning, and saw
that he had an enormous fire blazing in the fireplace; the room was
cozy with heat and as bright as day. She sprang up confused.

“They’re gone,” said Torrance. “I saw them ride away half an hour ago.
It’s daylight now. They were in their saddles while it was still dark.”

“You stayed awake all night, watching!”

“I kept an eye open part of the time,” he admitted. “And I noticed that
though you were asleep you didn’t seem exactly comfortable. A good
thawing out over a hot fire won’t hurt either of us.”

“Jim Torrance, what on earth are you made of? Steel?”

Already she had grown to love to hear that chuckle of his.

“Once upon a time, when I was very young,” he told her, “they taught
me a poem. It was all about what little boys and girls are made of. I
forget about the boys but it said about the girls:

“‘Sugar and spice
And everything nice,
That’s what little girls are made of.’”

Suddenly her face clouded; he remembered his first impression of her, a
sullen, smoldering little beauty with brooding, smoky eyes. Her mouth,
which had been softened by sleep, hardened.

“I haven’t been nice to you,” she said. “I’m afraid I haven’t been
very nice to anybody. The world wasn’t nice to me--it made me hate it
and it made me bitter inside.”

“Shucks,” he said lightly. “That’s nothing. You’re just a kid, that’s
all, and kids have got a right to cry and then sulk when they get their
fingers burnt.”

“I’m not a kid! I’m twenty--almost twenty-one.”

“As bad as all that? Quite an old lady, huh?”

“A thousand years old this morning; I can almost hear my bones creak
when I move. And what now, Mr. Jim Torrance?”

“The wind blew itself out about midnight,” he told her, “but it’s been
snowing harder than ever. We’ve got to have something to eat. If we
go on into Pocket Valley you might as well give yourself up. In this
storm no one else is apt to come along this way, so I leave you here
alone for a little while; I poke along into Pocket; I bring back some
provisions. Inside three hours I ought to be back. And, if I hurry
along,” he added, “I can still make out by their tracks the way Murdo
and his friend went. They headed down toward Pocket; I can find out if
they turned off anywhere.”

She went to the door and looked out over a white world. Snow was
drifting down in large feathery flakes; trees were dressed as in
ermine; the sky was thick and gray. She thought that she had never
looked out over an expanse so still and so lonesome. Her mood was not
one to appreciate its beauty, inescapable though it was.

“Of course you’re right, and of course I can’t go into Pocket or back
to Sundown, and of course I’m afraid to stay here alone--”

“I’m going to leave a gun with you.”

“I told you I’d never touch a gun again!”

“Oh, but you will, some time.” He slid one of his guns up out of its
leather and dropped it to her blankets. “I’m starting right away. My
horse is already saddled; the quicker I get going the quicker my tracks
will be covered and the quicker you’ll be having breakfast. You can
count on me being back in about four hours at most; if I’m not back
then-- Well, you’d better saddle and go on down into Pocket.”

She looked startled.

“Why shouldn’t you come back?”

He shrugged.

“I sure expect to. But a man never can tell, can he?”

A sudden suspicion suggested itself to her.

“You think you know who the man is with Clark Murdo? Someone you know?”

“I can’t be sure yet,” he returned, and once more sounded curt and hard.

“I know! You think it’s that other ‘Jim Torrance’!”

“You’re doing enough guessing now for both of us,” he grunted, and went
into the dugout for his horse.

She watched him ride away through gauzy veils of falling snow which
grew heavier until they almost blotted him out before he vanished in a
scattered growth of mountain cedars. She closed the door reluctantly
and went back to the fire for comfort and companionship.

As for Torrance, he made what speed he could as soon as he turned into
the white furrow, already smoothing over, that Clark Murdo and the
other man had made; for he realized how heavily a few hours in this
solitude could bear down on one--especially on a girl who had endured
as had Sally Dawn Cannon. He had told her he might be gone four hours;
he hoped to return within half that time.

The track left by the men whom he followed ran straight along the
flank of the ridge, curved about a blunt shoulder of the mountain and
then wavered downward among stunted pines, its course at all times
indicating Pocket Valley as its objective. Now and then Torrance caught
glimpses of the tiny village looking like a child’s toy town roofed and
based in fluffy cotton. As he rode lower down the slope a pine forest,
all black and silver, shut off his view; still the single track left by
Murdo and his mate led on. But when he had penetrated the forest some
five hundred yards, that track split into two fading trails. While one
kept straight on down into the valley, the other turned off almost at a
right angle into a dark and thickly timbered ravine.

“And now I make a bet,” said Torrance as, without stopping, he kept
on down toward Pocket Valley. “It will be Clark Murdo who has kept
straight on, the other man who has turned off into the canyon.”

His next glimpse of the settlement, afforded when he was almost at his
destination, showed him several pale smudges of smoke barely visible
against the gray curtain of the sky. He estimated that he had been
nearly an hour making his tortuous way down the mountain; by now it was
long after the time of an invisible dawn and folk would be astir.

Until now he had followed along the track which he was wagering had
been made by Murdo. At last, however, just before he rode out of the
rim of the wood into the open, he altered his course, keeping to the
timber for half a mile, not quitting it until he could approach Pocket
Valley town from a more southerly direction.

“No use telling friend Murdo that he and I rode the same way,” he
judged. “And, in case he is curious, by the time he gets around to
looking for my trail it won’t be there.”

Among the score of houses constituting the town of Pocket Valley he
had no difficulty in picking out the one he wanted, nor was the sign
over its front porch necessary as a guide. It was a long, low building
of rough logs on a foundation of granite blocks; at the rear was an
open shed to which he rode to stable his horse. He saw what he both
hoped and expected to see; another horse, still saddled, was tied here
worrying wisps of straw in a pole manger. He swung down, tied his own
horse, and noiselessly went up the steps to the back door. Before he
knocked he heard voices.

Then one of those voices called out to him, “Well, why don’t you come
in?” and he opened the door and entered directly upon a big barnlike
room in which a round-bellied stove was blazing red-hot and in which
three men stood about, all three with glasses in their hands.

One of the men was Clark Murdo.

“And so I win the first bet,” said Jim Torrance to himself with
considerable satisfaction.

The other men he had never seen. One he correctly took for the
proprietor of the place. He disposed of the other man with a flick of
his eyes; his real attention, though discreet, was bestowed upon Murdo.
That individual’s eyes were for an instant round with astonishment,
then narrowed and cold and noncommittal.

“Howdy, Stranger,” said the owner of the place. “Ride in on a
snowflake?”

“Sort of getting ready to get hungry,” said Torrance, and came on to
the stove, spreading his hands out toward it. “If there’s a store here
I’ve come to the right place, haven’t I?”

“Right as rain. Store, saloon, hotel and in season a place where you
can try to get your money back. Squat.”

Torrance moved to the rawhide-bottomed chair indicated, as though
weary, and sat down with a long sigh. Murdo, who had been watching his
every gesture and expression, spoke up then.

“Hello, Torrance,” he said. “What are you doing up this way?”

“Hello, Murdo,” said Torrance.

“Seems as though I’m gettin’ a whale of a lot of comp’ny for this time
of day on a snowy mornin’,” observed the proprietor. “And so you two
boys is acquainted, huh? That’s nice. Me, I’m Andy Stock, an’ though
we ain’t got around to breakfas’ yet, I c’n give you a shot of licker
right now an’ a cup of cawfee in two shakes.”

“I’ve been sort of thinking about coffee,” said Torrance.

Andy Stock turned to the other man.

“How about a fire in the cook stove, Jake? It’s cawfee time anyhow.”

Jake downed what remained of his drink and moved off through a door at
the side of the room, and almost immediately they heard him banging
at a kitchen stove. Murdo stood twirling his glass, appeared about to
speak, momentarily subdued his impulse, then let it go.

“Which way’d you come from, Torrance?” he asked, and sounded friendly
and casual.

“Sundown,” said Torrance.

“Sure. Of course. Up over the mountain or the roundabout way through
Tucker’s Flats?”

“Would it make any difference to you which way I came?” asked Torrance.
“And do you want to know why I dropped in and how long I’m staying and
how old I’ll be next birthday?”

Andy Stock laughed good-humoredly.

“Murdo just rid in himse’f,” he said. “Kinda early ridin’ for him, too.
I reckon he’s got something on his mind. He’s lookin’ for that girl
that killed his pardner, Steve Bordereau. I reckon he thought maybe you
had saw her somewheres. It ain’t in Murdo, you know, to come straight
forward with what he’s hankerin’ to find out; he’s always beatin’
around the bushes to get anywheres.”

“You talk too much, Stock,” growled Murdo.

“You think so, do you?” snapped Stock, suddenly angry. “Why, damn your
eyes--”

“Forget it,” said Murdo and stalked away to a window. He tried to peer
out, but the windowpane was filmed over with snow. Coming back he said:

“Let me have some oats, Andy. There was nothing in your shed but some
dirty straw, and my horse needs a feed if he’s going to carry me any
more today.”

Stock, still a trifle testy, snorted: “I’d say it’s about time to think
of feedin’ your hoss. You been here half an hour already, swiggin’
whisky, an’ never thinkin’ of the pore brute.”

“Oh, hell, let’s have the oats and less conversation,” said Murdo
impatiently.

Stock went off to his storeroom and returned with a dipper full of
oats; Murdo took it and went out. Stock winked at Torrance.

“What’d I tell you, Stranger?” he demanded in triumph. “There he goes
in his roundabout way to get him some place. He’d let his horse rest
there a week ’thout feedin’ the pore devil, but he’s jus’ figgered
out he can take a look-see at the tracks you made gettin’ here, an’
can answer him his own question about whether you rid down over the
mountains or come up from the south by way Tucker’s Flats.” He spat.
“Hell take Clark Murdo an’ all his pack,” he said. “And you, too, if
you’re a friend of his.”

Now Jim Torrance started asking questions, and asked them curtly and
swiftly to have his answers before Murdo returned. He began,

“What was it he said about a girl killing Steve Bordereau?”

“A girl name of Sally Dawn Cannon. Hell, ever’body knows who she
is; ol’ King Cannon’s daughter. She shot Bordereau at his place in
Sundown. Kilt him dead, says Murdo. Then she hightailed out of there
before they could grab her, though what they wanted to pester a girl
like her for, for just beefin’ a rat, me I don’t know. Likely he had
drove her in a corner.”

“Self-defence?”

“Murdo don’t say so. Says just plain hate and meanness.”

“Witnesses?”

“Murdo says him and four other Bordereau men seen it happen.”

“And still they let the girl get away? What do they expect to do with
her?”

“Lynch her, accordin’ to Murdo. But, shucks, the country wouldn’t
let ’em get away with that. Or maybe, would it?” He grimaced. “The
Bordereau gang of late has got a strangle-hold on the country from th’
other side Sundown to way up here.”

“There’ll be a big funeral, I suppose.”

“It’s already been. Murdo must of been in a hurry to see the last of
his pardner. They planted Steve Bordereau early next mornin’ right
after he was shot.”

Just then Stock’s roustabout stuck his head in through the kitchen
door and bawled: “Cawfee! Come an’ get it.” And a moment later Clark
Murdo came back from ministering to his horse and they all went to the
kitchen together.

Torrance, from under those lazy eyelids of his, noted two things: Murdo
on first entering looked relieved, and that meant that he had assured
himself that Torrance had ridden up from the south and not over the
mountain trail. Next, he saw that, as the four men chatted idly over
their coffee, Murdo began to tighten up again, to grow restless and
perhaps even anxious. He wondered about that until Murdo’s own words
gave him a clue. Again Murdo was asking questions, striving to be
merely friendly and casual. He said, “Riding on north, Torrance?”

Torrance seemed thawed by his strong hot coffee. He answered
carelessly, “Not in a hurry in all this weather.” He turned to Stock,
yawned and stretched and asked: “How about a shakedown for a few hours?
I didn’t get much sleep last night.”

“Sure,” said Stock. “Breakfast will be ready in a minute; then you can
flop long’s you like.”

“Got a barn where I can put my horse up?”

The barn, Stock told him, was just back of the shed; he’d find hay
there; help himself. So, while ham was frying and hot cakes were
mixing, he went out to the stable. He unsaddled, gave his horse a
rough-and-ready rubdown and returned for breakfast. Thereafter Stock
led him to a little room, empty save for its bunk and a washstand with
a lamp on it. At the door, as Stock was departing, Torrance called back
to Murdo, who was standing watching from the kitchen doorway.

“Happen to know a gent who calls himself Jim Torrance, Murdo?” he asked.

Murdo said, “What?” and it wasn’t because he hadn’t heard; maybe
he wanted to take a moment to think. Then Stock spoke up to say,
mystified, “I thought you was Jim Torrance.”

“I thought so too,” said Torrance, “but it seems there’s some other
man wearing the same name. Murdo might know him. How about it, Murdo?”

“No,” said Murdo. “I don’t know him.”

“Well,” said Torrance, “you might meet up with him some time. When you
do just tell him I’m hoping to see him.” And he closed the door.

He sat on the edge of his bed and slowly, with profound concentration
on something else, started rolling a cigarette. For a little while he
heard voices, Murdo’s and Stock’s, so clearly that he could catch some
of the words. Suddenly Murdo’s voice was lowered; then a door closed;
then all sounds were gone. He kept on rolling his cigarette, his eyes
the narrowest of slits, his face stern, his jaw set.

After a while, ten or fifteen minutes, he heard another door being
closed; the sound was faint but distinct against the silence; he judged
someone had gone out the back door. He went to his window and scraped
at it with his finger nail. It was hard to see through the snow-filmed
pane, but at last he found a spot in an upper corner through which the
light filtered less dimly. A moment later he saw Clark Murdo riding
around the corner of the house, headed back toward the mountain trail.
He even made out that Murdo had some sort of bundle on the saddle
before him; it looked like a full barley sack.

Torrance went back to Andy Stock then, finding him at the hot
pot-bellied stove. Stock looked at him in mild surprise. Then he
blurted out, “What the hell’s going on here anyhow?”

“Guess I don’t need a sleep after all,” Torrance told him and went to
the door to look out. Murdo was riding as rapidly as the snow would
permit and was already close to the rim of the forest. He turned to
stare the storekeeper in the eye, then to say thoughtfully, “Either
you’re an awful handy liar, Stock, or you haven’t got any more use for
Murdo than I have.”

“Take your pick, Torrance,” said Stock sharply. “What’s it to you,
anyhow?”

“Murdo’s out to drag the Cannon girl down. Me, I helped her make her
get-away.”

Stock nodded. “Murdo told me.”

“Well, I’ll tell you something else; I was there when the shooting
happened; I saw every bit of it. Until pretty recent I was taking it
for granted, like a man does, that cards were being dealt off the top,
and that things were what they looked like. Not now though. I don’t
believe the girl was the one that killed Bordereau. She shot him all
right; he went down; we got out of there. Then what? Some other person,
maybe Murdo himself, could have shot him again or popped a knife into
him. Anyhow it was Murdo that got him buried so gosh-awful sudden.”

Stock whistled, frowned and whistled again.

“What makes you think all that, man?”

“Two-three things. Maybe I’m right and maybe I’m wrong. Any way you
look at it, Murdo’s got no call to pull the kid down.”

“I’m with you there,” said Stock.

“All right. Now tell me a thing or two. Where did Murdo say he was
going? And what did he have in his sack?”

“He said he was goin’ up to see Pete Conroy. Conroy’s an old prospector
that lives back in the hills a ways. Murdo says Conroy hurt his leg and
couldn’t get out; that he’s takin’ him some grub. An’ grub was in the
sack.”

“Murdo’s a damn liar, but you don’t have to tell him I said so. Now
suppose you let me have a sack, too, and I’ll put about a tenth as much
stuff in it as Murdo has, and I’ll stagger along too.”

He laid in a small stock of provisions, making sure of coffee and sugar
and tinned milk, all packed in a can in which the coffee was destined
to come to a boil, and went for his horse. Andy Stock, from his door,
watched him ride away through the swirling snow and tucked in the
corners of his mouth. Jim Torrance rode mountainward in Clark Murdo’s
track.

“I’d sort of like to be on hand when it happens,” said Stock.

CHAPTER VII

Jim Torrance was tempted up to the yielding point when he came to that
spot on the mountain flank where a fresh track led deep into the dark
ravine. For this far Clark Murdo had come up from Pocket, and here he
had turned off to rejoin his companion of the earlier morning. And
Torrance, so sorely tempted to follow him, kept saying to himself, “I’d
know a lot if I overtook those two, and I’ve got the crazy hunch that
at last I’d come up with a man I’ve been looking for, for a long, long
time.”

But there was that girl waiting for him high on the ridge. He couldn’t
quite make a go of just letting her wait. He couldn’t quite get her
face out of his mind’s eye. She had stood pretty nearly all the
punishment you could expect her to stand--alone up there for hours with
only her own tragic thoughts for company. The kid must be nearly at her
rope’s end. In losing her mother it seemed that she had lost all she
loved. On top of that there was a corroding horror in her soul; she’d
be thinking over and over and endlessly over, “I killed a man.” She’d
be remembering the look on his face when he fell; she’d be thinking of
him dead and soon to be dug under. With just those two to think of,
her beloved mother and an ancient enemy, both dead so recently, she
could no longer be left alone by any man who did not love torture for
torture’s sake.

So, though rage was in his eyes, Torrance rode on and let a chance
slide by. Presently he got to thinking of other things: For one, Clark
Murdo by now knew that he had been tricked into believing that Torrance
had come up through the Flats in the south; he would have noted that
another horse than his had recently traveled this way; he would have
guessed mighty close to the truth. He could scarcely avoid being sure
that Torrance, too, had stopped over last night at the old deserted
mining camp. It was a simple step from that surmise to the next--that
Sally Dawn Cannon had stopped there with him and was perhaps there now;
that Torrance, like himself, had gone down to Pocket Valley seeking
provisions for still another mouth than his own.

“And he may be showing up as soon as he carries the news along to his
team mate,” mused Torrance.

Further, he marked that it was no longer snowing so heavily;
considering that this was the first storm of the season it might
reasonably be expected to wear itself out soon. That fact would have
its bearing on events.

* * * * *

When he came to the mountain cabin, there was Sally Dawn in the open
doorway waiting for him, a pale and weary, tragic figure with eyes
looking unnaturally large; he knew that in his absence she had broken
down and wept miserably. But a flash of gladness came into her eyes on
seeing him.

“I had no way of telling how long you were gone-- I began to be
afraid--”

“You began to wonder whether there was any breakfast coming up, I’ll
bet a man,” he said lightly as he dismounted.

“Honestly, I forgot about breakfast!”

“You ought to be starved.”

“Maybe I am!” She looked at his bundle in the barley sack. “I am
starved!” Then her eyes traveled questioningly back to his. “Tell me
what happened. What about Clark Murdo and the other man?”

He tethered his horse near the door and they went straightway to the
fireplace where she had a small fire still burning. But she thought to
ask, “Aren’t you bringing your horse inside again?”

“No. We’ll be riding right away, just as soon as you’ve eaten. And I’ll
tell you about things while ham’s frying and coffee coming to a boil.”

“Coffee! I’d rather have a cup of hot coffee than a buckskin bag full
of gold dust!”

“Sure,” he grinned at her. “It’s a lot more inviting this time of day.”

Together they prepared her breakfast while he explained how first
of all he had eaten down at the Pocket. “I’d have waited for you,”
he told her, “only I wanted things to look natural to Murdo.” Then
he told her briefly of his encounter with Murdo, of Murdo’s having
asked Andy Stock concerning her, of his general tall curiosity about
Torrance’s movements, about his having taken a sack of provisions to
his somehow-mysterious side-kick.

“They’re after me, of course,” said Sally Dawn.

“That doesn’t explain their hiding out in that canyon,” he retorted.
“But, yes, of course they’re after you. So as soon as you’ve had all
the coffee and hot cakes and ham you want--yes, I’ve got a couple of
eggs, too--we’ll fork our saddles and get out of here.”

“But they’ll be watching the trail, won’t they? They’ll see us on our
way down into the Pocket.”

“No they won’t, because we’re not headed down there. We’re turning
tail right here and drifting back to Sundown. We’ll make an easier and
quicker trip going down, and all by daylight too, than we made coming
up. Even if they follow, I don’t think they’ll overtake us. And if they
do come up with us-- Well, that won’t happen until it happens.”

Round-eyed and puzzled she heard him out without an interruption; then
she exclaimed:

“Sundown? You mean we’re to go back there? After all this long ride,
after we’ve almost got away? Back to Sundown?”

“Here’s sugar for your coffee. Here’s milk.” He jabbed a hole in the
can with his knife. “Yes, back to Sundown. It’s exactly where they
won’t be expecting us to go; likewise, I’m beginning to think it’s
where you’ll be safest. And it’s where you belong; it’s where your
ranch is. Mine, too.”

“Your ranch, yes. Mine?” She shook her head and sighed. Time was when
she had loved that ranch, King Cannon’s and her mother’s and hers, with
all her heart. “Mine is as good as gone from me for good now.”

“Maybe,” said Torrance. “A man never knows.”

“I’m not sure that I want to go back to Sundown,” she said, and sounded
altogether independent about it.

“Scared?” asked Torrance, and turned the sizzling ham with a stick.
“Here’s a hunk of bread and a dab of butter.”

“Of course I am! Have you forgotten all the things you said to me about
letting those men grab me?”

“While you finish eating, I’ll saddle your horse,” said Torrance, and
rose from his squatting position on the hearth. Standing high above
her, looking down on her tumbled brown tresses and then into her
uplifted puzzled gray eyes, he added: “No, I haven’t forgotten. I’ve
sort of changed my mind, that’s all.”

A faint flush came into her cheeks and a flash as of fire into her
smoky eyes. She could only surmise that he had had enough of their
adventure together. She said swiftly:

“You can go back! I’m going on. I’m never going near Sundown again as
long as I live.”

Then she was treated again to the sound of that soft chuckle of his.

“If you don’t go back, I don’t go either,” he said, and grinned down at
her. “But as it happens, we’re both going. Side by each, as the feller
says.”

Then he went and saddled her horse.

* * * * *

The return journey, as he had predicted, was much easier than had been
their trip up into the high places. By the time they had dropped down
two or three thousand feet there was but an inch or two of melting snow
under foot. And all day long they had met no one and had caught no
glimpse of Clark Murdo or any other following them.

In the early gray dusk she pointed, saying: “There’s your ranch. We’re
almost there.”

He seemed to come up out of a deep reverie.

“Know a funny little rooster named Sam Pepper?” he asked.

She looked at him wonderingly, he was so grave in his questioning.

“Of course I do! Everybody knows Sam Pepper. He is funny, but I like
him. What put him into your mind?”

The gravity slowly faded from his face and in its place came a slow
smile which in the end gave her the warm feeling of being enveloped by
it.

“When a man needs a helping hand,” he said, “he’s got to think about a
lot of folks he knows. Me, I’ve hit on Sam Pepper!”

“For help? Mercy! What sort of help? I never knew a more helpless
creature.”

“Is there by any chance a Mrs. Sam Pepper?”

“There is. She’s a darling; everybody loves her, the most motherly--”

But something came into her throat at the last word and she broke off,
averting her face. Torrance didn’t say anything; he leaned outward from
his saddle as though to pat her shoulder, but withdrew his hand without
touching her and without her seeing.

When they came down along the road in front of his gate he reined in
his horse and said quietly:

“I want you to stop here a little while. If the coast is as clear at my
place as it looks, and as it ought to be, I’ll poke over to have a word
with Sam Pepper--”

“I’ll go with you! Let’s go straight on there first of all.”

“Please!” It was the first time he had ever said that to her. “I’ve
been thinking about this all day. I’ll go alone to Pepper’s first; I’ll
make sure no one else is there. You’ll not be kept waiting more than a
few minutes.”

She nodded then and they rode on to his ranch house. The place was
empty; there was no sign that any prowlers had been about. He hurried
her into the house and her horse into the barn; it was nearly dark
then. Less than ten minutes later he was leaning from the saddle to rap
on Pepper’s door with the loaded end of his quirt. The door was opened
and a woman looked out, Mrs. Sam without a doubt. Sally Dawn’s epithet
“motherly” just fitted her. Middle-aged, apple-cheeked, comfortable and
cozy looking, she greeted the stranger smilingly.

“Howdy, Mrs. Pepper,” he said, and smiled back at her. “I’m your new
neighbor, Jim Torrance. Is your husband here?”

“He ain’t far,” said Mrs. Sam, and stepped out in the yard to call her
bugled notes, “Sam! Here’s company.”

She was calling and looking toward Sam Pepper’s high hill, calling
needlessly as it proved, for here already came Sam Pepper at a sort of
dog-trot run.

“I seen you just riding home, Torrance,” he said breathlessly as soon
as he was within hailing distance. “You and somebody else. It was kinda
dark and I couldn’t quite make out for sure-- You see, I just happened
to be up on my hill and--”

“You two folks alone?” asked Torrance.

“Sure. Always alone. Better light down--”

“That was the Cannon girl with me,” said Torrance. He speared the
little man with a glance and, after a fashion, through a long silence,
managed to keep him wriggling on the spear point. Then he added slowly
and significantly, “In case you might be interested I can tell you
several other things, things that a lot of folks are wondering about.”

Mrs. Sam snorted. “If there’s anything on earth Sam ain’t interested
in, I don’t know what it is. When he was born they say he was tryin’ to
count how many toes he had. But if Sally Dawn, poor little thing, is
over to your place--”

“Them Bordereau men will tear her to pieces if they find her!” burst
out Sam Pepper.

“I’ll go over and fetch her,” said Torrance. “We’ll be back right away.
And then I want a good talk with you, Pepper.”

* * * * *

When he brought Sally Dawn back with him she ran headlong into Mrs.
Sam’s mothering arms and put her head down on that deep, comforting
bosom--and Torrance and Sam Pepper stepped along outside and sat on a
log. That is, Torrance did; Sam Pepper couldn’t sit still, couldn’t
even stand still.

“I aim to make a dicker with you, Pepper,” said Torrance. “I need help
and you’re the one man can give it to me. And there are things you’d
like to know about, and I’m the man can tell you things no other man
can.”

“What sort of help, neighbor?” asked Pepper, all eagerness.

“I want you to help me find out things, to nose out some facts that are
keeping under cover.”

“Like what?” asked Sam, growing excited. “What about?”

“Give me time and I’ll tell you.-- Say, what’s happened to Murdo?”

“Hanged if I know.” He looked worried. “He’s gone and nobody knows
where! So’s Doc Taylor! So was you and Sally until--”

“Who’s Doc Taylor? What about him?”

“He was called in when Bordereau was shot. He went upstairs to look
at Bordereau; I seen him. Next morning nobody could find him. I been
asking folks; nary a one has seen hide nor hair of him.”

Torrance stared at him through the growing dark for a long while, then
whistled softly.

“I can tell you what Murdo’s been up to all day and where he’s been,”
he said crisply, and stood up. “And I can ask you this, ‘Why did they
bury Bordereau in such a hurry?’”

If Pepper had been doing a sort of restrained dance before, now he
fidgeted himself into something between an Apache war dance and an
Irish jig. He was all but frothing at the mouth as he gasped out, “Mr.
Torrance, I’ve been asking myself--”

“I know,” said Torrance. “I can also tell you where the Cannon girl and
I have been-- I was on hand when Bordereau got shot, so I can tell you
details about that--I can even tell you why I came up here looking for
a man named Jim Torrance--”

“For God’s sake!” pleaded the little man.

“Are you with me?” demanded Torrance sharply. “Will you throw in with
me to find about everything? We’ll be helping Sally Dawn Cannon, if
that means anything to you. You’ll learn one hell of a lot--but you’ll
keep your mouth shut about it all until I say the word or I’ll chop you
up into dog meat.”

He looked as though he meant it. Sam Pepper shivered. Right now he
clamped his mouth shut so tight that there were little puckers at the
corners which Torrance, stooping so close to him, could see even in the
fading light.

“It’s a deal?” demanded Torrance.

Sam Pepper didn’t open his mouth even then. But he nodded his head with
a rapidity that made Torrance think of a woodpecker hammering on an oak.

“Go get your horse,” said Jim Torrance. “We’re riding into Sundown.”

CHAPTER VIII

Early though the hour was, the Stag Horn was crowded. Excitement had
run high in Sundown, and men clustered here where the current chain of
events had seemed to have its inception; here, if anywhere, they could
get the latest low-down on what it was all about.

Florinda, extravagantly attired, white-bosomed and sparkling with her
“family jewels,” strutted like a peacock. With Steve Bordereau away,
with Murdo away too, she was more the tinsel queen than ever before.
She disported herself as though it was she, Florinda de Valdez y
Verdugo, who owned the place.

She saw Jim Torrance, travel-stained and somewhat hollow-eyed, come in
with a furtive and apprehensive Sam Pepper at his heels, and stiffened.

Torrance’s eyes were hunting her down. When they found her he came to
her as straight as a string.

“Señorita!” he said to her in Spanish, and his tired eyes mocked her.
“You are lovelier than a little white dove with pink feet; you are
lovelier than a little dove sitting in the hollow of a man’s hand. I am
going to buy you some wine, and you are going to sit with me for three
minutes and smile at me--and answer a question!”

Her teeth were like pearls, her loveliest and most genuine gems. Though
she looked uncertain and frightened and ready to run, she smiled. She
said, “_Si_, Señor Jeem Torrance,” and made her skirt billow above her
slim ankles as she led in haste the way to a secluded corner table.

Sam Pepper, goggling wide-eyed in all directions, followed the two
like a little dog with its tail tucked in. He had been upstairs in
these rooms just once before in all his days; that was when Bordereau
had opened for his first night, and Sam’s insatiable curiosity got him
admitted at a cost in dollars which he had never confessed to Mrs. Sam.

The three sat down. Florinda looked at Sam Pepper as at a bug. The
waiter brought wine. When Torrance began to speak, Sam Pepper ceased
goggling all over the room and distended his ears instead.

“Florinda,” said Torrance, “we have met before, you and I.”

She nodded.

“In Nacional,” she whispered.

“So you remember?”

Her eyes became mysterious, unfathomable. She said almost inaudibly, “I
am not going to forget; not ever, Señor.”

“Bordereau was there that night?”

“Yes.”

“A man was killed that night?”

“Yes! You know--”

“Who killed him?”

“But I do not know, Señor! It was-- I thought it was--”

“I did not kill that man. Did Bordereau?”

“I thought--I thought you killed him! Bordereau? But I do not know,
Señor! Not anything.”

He stared at her a long while, trying to make out whether she lied. By
this time there were hot spots of color in Sam Pepper’s tanned cheeks.
Abruptly Torrance switched to other matters.

“With Steve Bordereau dead,” he said, “who takes over here? Who’s the
big gun now at the Stag Horn?”

“Murdo. He and Steve were somehow partners.”

“Are you and Murdo good friends?”

Her velvet-black eyes unsheathed themselves in a flash.

“He is a pig. I hate him.” Only she said, “He is a peeg.”

“Did you see Doc Taylor come in the night after Bordereau was shot?”

“Yes. I followed into the room. Steve was not dead yet. Then Murdo
t’row me out.”

“And Doc Taylor?”

“I do not know, Señor. He was there when I go. Two-t’ree hour after
that a man comes running, telling everybody his little boy baby is
sick; he is crazy to find the doctor quick. He come back two, t’ree
time. He come again today; he say he cannot find the doctor. I do not
know, Señor.”

Torrance slid some money across the table. “You can go now,” he said.

She rose slowly with a queer, native dignity. The money she ignored
absolutely, as though she had not seen it. Her eyes were a little
brighter, her face hotter with color.

“I am your friend, if you will have it that way, Señor,” she said, in
a soft voice which trembled just a trifle and which was very earnest.
Then she hurried away, almost running.

Sam Pepper, looking about to explode with all that pent-up curiosity
seething within him, began babbling questions, but Torrance promptly
shut him up, saying:

“Not now, Sam. You’ve got to wait, if it kills you. Right away I want
you to help me. Remember that I’m a stranger here and that you ought to
know everybody. We’ve got us a job of work to do tonight, and it might
come in handy if we had a few other fellows, say four or five, to lend
a hand. Men that are on the up-and-up and that we can trust. How about
it?”

Sam Pepper’s eyes started roving again. Then he shook his head.

“Not upstairs, Torrance. Downstairs in the bar I’d be sure to find some
boys like that, that I know and that a man can tie to.”

“Step down and round ’em up,” said Torrance. “Make it lively. Friends
of the Cannon girl if you can find them. I’ll be with you in no time.”

Sam slid out of his chair and hurried out of the room. When Torrance
went downstairs a few minutes later he had reason to congratulate
himself on the choice of his ally. Pepper had already gathered half a
dozen dependable looking men. Five of them, especially sought out by
Pepper, were young stock men, and neighbors of the Cannons; the sixth,
older and slightly bald, yet a man ready for anything, had not been
invited but had horned in--and that man was Lying Bill Yarbo. Pepper
looked at him accusingly; as for Jim Torrance, he was glad to have
Yarbo of their number. At a nod from him they followed him outside.

“I’m playing a wild hunch tonight, boys,” he told them. “I’ll tell you
all about it in a minute. First get this: If I’m wrong we’re apt to
have a fight on our hands, and if I’m right we’ll be turning up to the
light a pretty dirty trick that’s been played and that’s still in play.”

One of the young fellows, lean and lanky Dave Drennen who had once
worked for King Cannon and who now was running a small spread of his
own, spoke up quietly.

“Somehow what you’ve got in mind is to help out Sally Cannon? You’re a
friend of hers and you know what’s gone with her?”

“It’s to help out the Cannon girl, and to help me out, too. Yes, I know
where she is. So does Pepper.”

“Sure I do,” said Pepper. “Right now she--”

“Keep it under your hat a little longer,” commanded Torrance. “Now if
you boys will wander along with me we’ll get busy. Likewise I’ll tell
you what I’m banking on.”

He led the way and the others came along, walking swiftly down the
sidewalk toward a hardware store which he had noted on his first day
in Sundown. It was too early for a store to be closed and there were a
couple of articles he wanted. But the little group of men hadn’t gone
over a block when Sam Pepper, who seemed to have eyes in the back of
his head and whose ears were always registering sounds to which others
gave no attention, came to a sudden halt.

“Say!” he exclaimed. “There’s Clark Murdo! And there’s someone with
him! Say, he’s got the girl! That’s Sally Dawn he’s yanking along after
him!”

Three or four riders had drawn up in front of the Stag Horn; that was
what Sam Pepper had heard first of all. They had dismounted; Clark
Murdo had called out sharply, issuing some swift command. Then he and
those with him passed into the Stag Horn.

“So,” thought Torrance, “Murdo followed us after all, found the girl
and has brought her here.” He said aloud: “We’ll go back, boys, but let
Murdo show his hand first. Funny he has brought her back to Sundown;
with so many folks around, he can’t raise a finger against her. He--”

“You don’t know what you’re talking about!” snapped Sam Pepper. “He
will hand her over to Rufe Biggs; Rufe’s town marshal, as crooked and
mean as a snake and a skunk--and belongs body and soul to Bordereau. Or
did. With Bordereau dead, I guess he’s in Murdo’s pocket. He could jail
her, couldn’t he? After that, him and Murdo could do as they damned
well pleased.”

“Just the same, take it slow,” muttered Torrance. “I’ve got something
up my sleeve and we’re going to know right soon whether it’s an ace or
a low card.”

When they came back into the Stag Horn they saw that Pepper had things
partly right if not entirely. There was Rufe Biggs, town marshal, tall
and yellow-haired and pale-eyed, towering over Sally Dawn, who looked
very small and helpless and weary. There was Murdo, doing a lot of
talking; there was hot fury in his eyes, to be explained perhaps by a
fresh gash on his cheek from which blood was still dribbling. He kept
dabbing at it with his bandana.

“She’s yours, Rufe,” he said. “I caught her hiding out up at Sam
Pepper’s place. You ought to arrest him, too. You ought to go grab that
damn wife of his; she threw a butcher knife at me. Anyhow here’s this
Cannon girl that murdered my pardner. Me, I say, woman or no woman, let
the law take its course.”

No one laughed at the thought of Sam Pepper’s wife attacking Murdo with
a butcher knife; that could be explained solely by the fact that nearly
every man here was a follower of the team of Bordereau and Murdo. They
would laugh later, when Murdo wasn’t there.

Rufe Biggs, stepping closer to the girl, was just lifting his hand to
put it on her shoulder, just opening his mouth to announce her arrest,
when Jim Torrance’s voice, sounding flat and toneless, made itself
heard through the brief silence.

“Me, I’m a stranger here, but there are some things even a stranger
might like to know about. One is, why did Murdo have to see to it that
Steve Bordereau got buried in such a hurry?”

Sally Dawn, hearing him, whirled about, all eagerness and expectancy.
Murdo’s black brows came down in a heavy frown.

“What the hell business is this of yours anyhow?” he demanded.

“Another thing,” said Torrance in the same expressionless tone, “who
killed Bordereau? This girl here? Well, how many times did she shoot
him?”

“This ain’t any trial court, brother,” said Rufe Biggs.

“Of course it was the Cannon girl that killed him, and you know it,”
snapped Murdo. “She shot him twice, close up; once in the body, the
second shot in the head. She--”

Sally Dawn’s gasp was drowned by Torrance’s reply to Murdo.

“You’re a damned liar, Murdo,” he said. “She shot him just once.”

Murdo’s hand went as quick as a flash to his low-slung gun. But Jim
Torrance’s two hands were already on his two guns, and there was a
cold, deadly look in his low-lidded eyes which acted as a deterrent.
Murdo shrugged.

“There’s one more thing that a man might like to know about,” Torrance
went on after a little pause. “Where’s Doc Taylor? Nobody seems to have
seen him since he went up to take care of Bordereau.”

A queer look came into Murdo’s eyes at that; the color ran up into his
swarthy cheeks, subsiding slowly.

“What the hell are you driving at anyhow?” he said thickly.

Torrance didn’t answer him. Instead he said to Sally Dawn Cannon:
“You’ll be all right now; the marshal will hold you where you’ll be
safe for maybe an hour. Then we’ll come back and see you home or
wherever you want to go.” He turned and went back to the door. “Come
along, boys,” he said, as the eyes of his new allies followed him.
“We’ll know damned quick what it’s all about.”

This time Sam Pepper was the last to follow. He hung back long enough
to ask of the girl, “Is Molly all right, Sally?”

“They were brutes to her. They left her tied up, so she couldn’t come
along with us. Yes, she’s all right, Sam--and she was wonderful!”

Sam Pepper then was sadly torn two ways. He wanted to rush back and
free his wife and hear all details of what had happened; he wanted with
all his heart to find out what Jim Torrance had up his sleeve, whether
ace or deuce. In the end, hurrying after the men who were already
hurrying after Torrance, he found a half-grown, gawky and open-mouthed
youth whom he dispatched to set Mrs. Pepper free. Then at a run he came
up with Jim Torrance.

“Where we going now, Torrance?” he asked. “What we going to do?”

“We want a couple of picks and shovels,” said Torrance. “We’re going
out to the graveyard.”

Sam Pepper’s mouth came open for an exclamation and remained open with
never a sound being made.

Together with the tools which Torrance had mentioned, they picked up a
couple of lanterns. In the graveyard, companionably close to the edge
of town, they shone the light of their lanterns on a freshly painted
headboard. It advised that Here Lay Steve Bordereau, Gambler, Friend
and Gentleman.

“Let’s dig,” said Torrance. “We might be interrupted, and there’d be
sure to be some around here who’d say this sort of thing was against
the law. Let’s get busy.”

Lying Bill Yarbo began swearing in his rich deep voice and was the
first to wield a pick. Sam Pepper shivered delightfully from head to
foot and was of no earthly use. A contagion of excitement spread over
the others. In no time at all they brought the coffin up and pried the
lid off.

Torrance, stooping to look closely, said only:

“This isn’t Steve Bordereau. Who is it?”

A yell burst from Sam Pepper.

“It’s Doc Taylor! Doc Taylor, by the powers! What’s he doing dead here?
Who done him in? And where’s Steve Bordereau? And what’n hell’s blazes
does it all mean?”

“Let’s pick up the box and carry it back to the Stag Horn, boys,” said
Torrance.

CHAPTER IX

Jim Torrance came stalking back into the Stag Horn. He had been away so
short a time that he found things here pretty much as he had left them.
Sally Dawn Cannon stood where he had seen her last and did not seem
to have moved. Only a few paces from her, talking quietly into each
other’s attentive ears, were Clark Murdo and the marshal, Rufe Biggs,
keeping their eyes on her all the time. The only change in grouping
that Torrance could note was this: A dozen men, hard hombres he judged
them, and Murdo men, had gathered just behind Murdo and Biggs; they
looked ready at the drop of the hat for anything they might be called
on to deliver.

As Torrance entered, the room grew hushed and every eye turned to him.
He stepped to one side of the door and got his back to the wall before
he spoke. Then it was the girl whom he addressed.

“Everything’s all right now,” he said. “You’ll be free to go in about
two minutes!”

“Like hell!” roared Murdo, tense and worried and truculent. “All you’re
doing is a lot of wild talking. You’d better fold up and blow before
you get yourself dehorned. _Sabe, hombre?_”

Torrance ignored him. To Rufe Biggs he said:

“We stepped out to the graveyard. Somebody seems to have been digging
out there. The boys are bringing you what we found. Here they come
now.”

They squeezed through the door, carrying the redwood box on their
shoulders. It was Lying Bill Yarbo who set something down on the box
when it had been deposited on the floor before Rufe Biggs.

“Here’s the headboard that went with the coffin,” said Yarbo. “Step up
and read it, gents.”

Neither Biggs nor Murdo moved or spoke; they looked swiftly at each
other and looked away even more swiftly. Other men crowded close. One
sang out: “Hell, they’ve dug Bordereau up! Can’t they let a dead man
lie in peace?”

“Maybe this dead man didn’t want to lie in peace until he’d had his own
funeral and not somebody else’s,” drawled Torrance, and kept watching
Murdo. “Lift the lid off, boys.”

A shout went up: “It’s Doc Taylor! It ain’t Steve at all! By the Lord,
it’s Doc Taylor in Steve’s box!”

“You’ll find he’s had his head bashed in,” said Torrance. “Whether that
killed him outright or whether he smothered after his quick burial, I
don’t know. Maybe the coroner can find out. Anyhow, Biggs, he’s yours
now. And you might ask your friend Murdo what he did with Bordereau and
why he put Taylor in his place!”

“Why, damn you!” yelled Murdo, and again he went for his gun--and again
he thought better of it.

“That’s twice you’ve done that, Murdo,” said Torrance. “Mean anything
by it?”

Murdo, like Steve Bordereau in this, was a certain type of gambler,
the cold-blooded, calculating type that will bet as high as any
man--but only on a dead sure thing. Right now, though he had a hard,
gun-slinging pack at his back, the odds for him personally did not
appear to strike him as right. He got himself in hand, throttling down
his anger, which he so seldom let sweep him away, and spoke coolly and
with the affectation of a sneer.

“Seems like, for a stranger, you’re getting around,” he said.

“And at that I’ve still got quite some traveling to do,” returned
Torrance. To the roomful of silent, puzzled men he added: “Later on you
boys can figure out just what happened, but one thing ought to be clear
enough to the thickest skull right now: First, Bordereau isn’t any more
dead than you are; he wasn’t even bad hurt. The Cannon girl shot him
high up, in the right shoulder I think it must have been. He put his
hand up as he fell back and got blood on it and got the blood smear
on his forehead. Then he got him his hunch to play dead, and you can
take it from me he had his reasons for wanting to do that! Then some
busybody brought the doctor in, and some helping friend of Bordereau’s
cracked the doc over the head to keep him from going out and spilling
the beans. That done, they have the funeral right away, Doc Taylor
taking Bordereau’s place while Bordereau goes off somewhere and holes
up until his wound heals. I’d say Marshal Biggs would be inside his
rights to gather Murdo in and hold him on suspicion.”

A lean and foxy-faced young fellow, that same gimlet-eyed young hellion
who had come out to Torrance’s place looking for the vanished girl,
began whispering in Murdo’s ear. Murdo listened, then grinned.

“You’re right, kid,” he said, and then spoke his piece to all who
cared to listen--and that meant all within earshot. “Torrance and some
other boys go out and do some digging in the graveyard. They come back
with Steve’s headboard and a coffin! Who’s to tell us it was Steve’s
coffin in the first place? And if it was, who’s to say they didn’t lift
Steve out and put Taylor in? Who’s here to say they didn’t kill Taylor
themselves?”

“That’s right,” said Biggs quickly. “Dammit, that’s right!”

“Better watch your step, Echo Biggs,” warned Torrance. “Anyhow get this
straight: You can’t arrest this girl for killing Bordereau when more
than one of us knows Bordereau hasn’t been killed. Now I’m going to
tell you all a little story. About six years ago a pardner of mine and
myself were down at a little border town called Las Lunas, sixty miles
from Nacional. We had forty thousand dollars between us and were taking
our time to sink it in a cow outfit. One day when Danny was alone at
the cabin some gent stepped in, shot him in the back of the head and
made off with our stake. And the gent that did that went to a good bit
of trouble to make it look as though I had murdered my own pardner.”

Murdo, though slow with his gun tonight, was quick with his tongue.

“A pardner-killer, huh?” he said. “So that’s what you are!”

“The gent that killed Danny,” Torrance continued imperturbably,
“stepped right along. But he still kept up his play at getting me
blamed for his night’s work. Twenty miles farther along he wrapped a
bandana about his face, held up two sheep men that everybody knew had
been hoarding for a long time, robbed them, killed one, said to the
other, ‘Me, I’m Jim Torrance, and when you hear me coming you better
hide,’ and kept on going. And only a year ago the same gent, or I’m
guessing wrong, plugged a man down in Nacional when I was in town, and
tried to throw that on me. His game was and still is clear enough. He
knows damned well I’ll get him some day, if he can’t fix it up so that
some hot-headed party swings me to a cottonwood first.”

“What the hell’s this got to do with us?” demanded Rufe Biggs.

“Plenty. I came up this way looking for a man that calls himself Jim
Torrance whenever he pulls a fast one. I’ve got a reason or two to bet
any man of you a thousand dollars to a hundred that that gent is Steve
Bordereau. And, if you want to know, that’s why Bordereau is playing
dead right now. He’s the sort that shoots a man in the back, that tries
to manhandle a girl, that sets his yellow dog onto smashing Doc Taylor
over the head and burying him just to give him a chance to hide out. He
means to make his final clean-up here, then drift along somewhere else
where they don’t know him, take a new name--and maybe get to be mayor
or something like that.”

“Got any proof of all this, Stranger?” demanded Biggs, beginning to
look a trifle uncertain.

“Somebody’s already said,” Torrance told him, “that this place isn’t
any courthouse. Besides, I’ve talked myself out for one night.” He
turned to Sally Dawn Cannon. “If you’re ready we’ll step along.”

She started forward eagerly. Rufe Biggs put out an involuntary hand to
detain her, but Murdo moodily shook his head. Biggs dropped his hand
and seemed relieved to do so, and Sally Dawn came swiftly to Torrance’s
side. She stepped around the grewsome thing lying there on the floor
staring up at her, and shuddered; but once outside in the clean night
air, with friends about her, shudders were forgotten and an ecstasy
thrilled through her. She put her two hands impulsively on one of Jim
Torrance’s hard brown ones. She said with a catch in her voice:

“Some day when I can get a good dictionary I’m going to read it all the
way through.” He jerked up his black brows at her, as much as to ask:
“Who’s crazy now? You or me?” Then she ran on: “Maybe that way I can
find the words to thank you! But for you, where’d I be now? But for
you, I’d all my life go on thinking I’d killed a man.”

He chuckled at last, the way she loved to hear him.

“Shucks,” he said. “If you’d nailed Steve Bordereau proper, that
wouldn’t have been anything to keep you awake, and you’d have saved me
a job.”

Then they mounted, all of them, and rode out of town. For a few minutes
Jim Torrance and Sally Dawn rode neck and neck. That was while he said
to her a word or two he felt impelled to speak. He said:

“You’ve got good friends and unless I’m a liar you’re going to have a
lot more real soon. You can go back to your ranch when you want to. Why
not stay with the Peppers tonight? And when you go back home, why not
have them come along, and Bill Yarbo and a couple of the other boys?
And keep this in mind: You haven’t lost your ranch yet; you can bet
your sweet life that Bordereau pulled a crooked trick or two getting
you folks out on a limb; stick to it and you’ll beat him yet.”

At the edge of town they rode into the deep dark under a thick grove of
big pines; when she said something to Torrance, still thinking him at
her side, it was Lying Bill Yarbo who answered.

“Where’s Jim Torrance?” she asked.

He didn’t exactly know. No one else knew. They called for Torrance and
got no answer.

He had dropped back, cut into a side trail and was already well ahead
of them hurrying to his own place. He said to his horse, with whom he
grew conversational at times when they had it all to themselves: “Here
we’ve been putting in a lot of time messing around in a girl’s affairs
and letting our own slide. Let’s change all that.”

At his ranch he went out to the barn and threw down a plentiful lot of
hay into the mangers; the stock would be finding short browsing and
feeling the want of warm shelter. He pulled his saddle and bridle,
gave his horse a good rubdown and a here’s-thanks-old-boy slap on the
rump, went out into the corral and tossed a skilful noose over his
liveliest black mare’s neck. This one he saddled and left in readiness;
thereafter he went into his house for a shave, a bite, and ten minutes’
relaxation flat on his back.

And then the thing happened which he might have expected, had he had
all his wits about him. For of course he had lighted a lamp, and he had
not covered his south window--and here came Sam Pepper on the run.

And Sam’s words, as he bounced into the house, ran even faster than a
spry Sam Pepper could travel. There was a gleam in his eye, there were
red spots in his cheeks, there was something akin to venom on his ready
tongue. From the doorway he cussed Jim Torrance up hill and down dale.

“What’s eating you?” demanded Torrance, leaning on his elbow.

“You--you--you--” There Sam bogged down. But he grew vocal instantly.
“You wanted me to help you, and I done it. You was going to let me in
on a lot of secret doings--and, instead, you run out on me! What’s
more, you only set me wondering about a lot of other things! I got a
notion to cut your gizzard out and fry it in hawg fat and make you eat
it!”

Torrance stood up. Of a sudden Sam Pepper, thinking himself about to
be attacked by a man to whom killing was just a chore, leaped back
out through the door, which, perhaps subconsciously, he had kept open
against retreat.

“Don’t shoot, Jim. Don’t shoot!” he pleaded. “I was just funning. Shore
I was, Jim.”

Torrance laughed at him and sat back on the edge of his bed. Pepper
sidled back into the room. And then, brushing him aside, Lying Bill
Yarbo came barging in.

“What the merry hell’s going on here?” shouted Bill Yarbo, comporting
himself like a storm wind blowing its heartiest. “You’d run out on me,
would you? And connive with this tricky, lying Sam Pepper? The truth
ain’t in him and you ought to know it; and still you let him come in
and powwow with you unbeknownst to others. Torrance, are you a damn’
fool on top of other things?”

Here was another cue for a laugh from Jim Torrance that started low
down somewhere in his anatomy and rose into a glorious crescendo. He
got to thinking, “If I went out gunning for a couple of boys to keep me
from going to sleep on my feet, I couldn’t do better than S. Pepper and
L. B. Yarbo.” But all that he said to them about all this was said in
that laugh of his. He was a man with a tight smile, with now and again
a mellow chuckle--with a laugh like that maybe once a year.

Sam Pepper stared, pop-eyed; Lying Bill glared. It was Lying Bill Yarbo
who spoke.

“What’n merry hell are you talking about?” he demanded, and his big
burly fists were doubled into young parboiled hams at his sides.

“Since you ask,” said Torrance, “I’m going for a chat with Steve
Bordereau.”

“You do know then where he’s at?” gasped Sam Pepper, goggling.

“I’ve got a notion. My horse is saddled. I’m riding right away.”

“I’m going along,” said Yarbo heavily.

“Don’t you let him, Jim!” stuttered Sam Pepper. “There’s like to be
trouble when you find Bordereau. Me, I’m your man. Yarbo here, he’d let
you down--he’s the damnedest coward in seven states and--”

Lying Bill made a lunge at him but with almost incredible alacrity Sam
Pepper scuttled across the room and established himself behind the
headboard of Torrance’s bed.

“Pepper’s such a damn little liar,” snorted Lying Bill.

This time Torrance didn’t laugh; he was no longer in the mood for any
light comedy. He saw what ailed them both, each man hating the hide
the other walked in, each wishing his own subconsciously acknowledged
failing upon the other. He said curtly:

“You boys stood in with me tonight and I’m obliged. I’ll be glad any
time to do the same for both of you. Now I’ve got me a job that belongs
to me and I’d better take it on single-handed.”

“Dammit, you ain’t got no gratitude!” yipped Sam Pepper. “If you had,
you’d ask me along. You made a deal with me, remember; me, I done my
part and you ain’t done yours!”

“Oh, hell, come along if you want to,” grunted Torrance. He got up and
jammed on his hat. “You’ve got a ride ahead of you though.”

“Me, too!” boomed Bill Yarbo. “If there’s apt to be a showdown with
Steve Bordereau, I’ve got a right to be in it. Hell’s bells, man, I’m
the best friend Sally Dawn’s got; me and her old man, King Cannon, was
boys together and--”

“He never seen King Cannon but once,” cried Pepper, “and then Cannon
booted him clean off’n his ranch.”

Yarbo made a dive at him and Pepper slid up close behind Torrance’s
back. Torrance sang out sharply:

“Look here, you two horn toads! You’re both welcome to trail along if
you’re fools enough to do it, but I can’t bother with you if you can’t
keep your damn mouths shut about each other. If you want to start
something, better stay here and do it. I’ve got something else to do
than trying to stand betwixt you.”

“I’ll leave him alone if he’ll leave me alone,” muttered Sam Pepper.

“Me too,” grumbled Lying Bill, though with reluctance.

“Only,” added Sam, “it would be a heap sight better if he went back
home and stayed there!”

“You--!” shouted Yarbo.

But under that cold, low-lidded look that they got from Jim Torrance
they grew silent. And in the end, not over ten minutes later, the three
mismated musketeers rode out together--toward a meeting with Steve
Bordereau.

CHAPTER X

They had made their packs--blankets, bacon and beans, coffee, frying
pan and coffeepot--and headed up into the mountains, riding the same
trails Torrance and Sally Dawn had so recently traveled. They camped
that night at the same deserted shack that had sheltered him and the
girl on the first leg of their journey, and were up and riding at
the first glint of a pale gray daybreak. No snow fell that day; by
mid-forenoon tattered streaks of clear sky were like pale-blue banners
above the far ridges. And when they came to the old mining camp high
above Pocket Valley, the mountains as far as they could see swam in
a diaphanous purple mist, and the western horizon was aflame with a
red-and-gold sunset.

“Now I’ll tell you boys all I know,” said Torrance, and hooked a leg
over the saddle horn while he reached for the makings. “Murdo and
somebody else camped here night before last. I could see Murdo through
the window; the other man was on a bunk in the corner and I couldn’t
see him. And I couldn’t hear what they were talking about. But I could
tell that the other man was giving orders and that Murdo was taking
them. So it’s a fair bet it was Bordereau.”

“Where’d they go to?” demanded Sam Pepper.

“Down trail toward Pocket. But they swung off where there’s a narrow
canyon. Then Murdo went down alone to Pocket, filled his grub bag and
went back up the canyon. So it’s my bet that that’s where Bordereau is
now, hiding out where nobody’d look for him, the same time he gets well
of a bullet hole somewhere in his carcass.”

“Me, I know that canyon like I know my hat,” said Bill Yarbo. “And I
know right where we’ll find Bordereau, sure. You see, Torrance, about
thirty year ago there was all hell to pay about the mines up here. And
Sally Dawn’s old gent, though he was a stock man first, last and all
the time, took an interest. He was in the money in them days. He come
up here; he bought up some mining properties; and he likewise grabbed
off a little valley all his own for a summer range. What’s more, he
built him a house, and he’d come up here when he felt like loafing, and
go hunting and fishing. That house stands there yet, quite a place, and
it’s up that canyon--and you couldn’t find a likelier place for a man
to hide out and lick his wounds.”

“And for once he ain’t lying!” said Sam Pepper, in a tone of awe.

“Far from here?” asked Torrance.

Bill Yarbo, having glared at Pepper, said, “Hell, no. If we poke right
along we’ll get there before it’s too dark to see the whites of their
eyes. Bordereau won’t be all alone, you know.”

“No,” admitted Torrance. “He’d have someone--”

“I know!” exclaimed Sam Pepper. “He’s got anyhow three-four, maybe
more men with him! There’s Hen Billings and Varney Slack and that
half-breed, Joe Tortillas; that’s three of ’em anyhow! And--let’s see--”

“How would _you_ know?” snorted Bill Yarbo.

“Me, I sort of notice things,” snapped Pepper. “When I go places, I
look around. Now since the night Bordereau got hurt I ain’t seen hide
nor hair of any one of them three, and they’re always hanging around
where Steve Bordereau is! Yep. And-- Say, I ain’t seen Turkey-trot
Smith or Andy Pollack, and they was both in Sundown when Bordereau got
shot! I’ll bet he’s got the whole gang up there!”

Torrance shrugged.

“There’s just one way to find out,” he said, and unhooked his leg from
the saddle horn.

“Hey, wait!” said Sam Pepper, and looked worried. “It’ll be dark--we
better camp here overnight, anyhow. And maybe--maybe--”

Bill Yarbo glared at him scornfully, then pretended spontaneous
laughter. Sam Pepper went red to the gills.

“I ain’t scared!” he sputtered. “I’m just using my brains. If only
three of us go jumping a crowd like Bordereau’s got--”

“There’s only two of us that counts,” said Yarbo. “Come ahead, Jim,
let’s get along.”

“There’s something else,” said Pepper hastily. “You can bet your
boots that Bordereau’ll be ready for us! Don’t you suppose Murdo got
word across to him in a hurry? Them two are playing this game close
together.”

“If Murdo or a messenger had passed us--”

“He wouldn’t have to. He could have come up by the Flats. Or he could
have sent some sort of signal. Me, I noticed some smoke standing up in
the sky back yonder over High Man’s Ridge; I wondered about it, too.”

“You would wonder,” guffawed Lying Bill Yarbo. “Come ahead, Jim. Let
the little rooster stick here or run back home to his old woman.” Then
he grinned very broadly, his eyes peering tauntingly at Pepper, as
he added, “Maybe Murdo and a bunch of cutthroats are following along
behind us now, Jim; maybe Mr. Sam Pepper, scooting back home, will run
smack-kerdab into them!”

Sam Pepper, from red, turned a pasty white, and his eyeballs rolled.
Then, when Torrance pushed on again and Lying Bill Yarbo fell in
behind, Sam Pepper knew a moment of dreadful doubt. It was soon going
to be dark. A timber wolf, perhaps the same hungry old fellow that
Sally Dawn and Jim Torrance had heard, howled after a fashion to make
the white solitudes seem ten thousand times more dreary and lonely.
It wasn’t that Sam was afraid of the wolf; a man in a haunted house
wouldn’t be afraid of the creak of a floor board; such sounds, however,
didn’t perk a man up. He shivered and spurred hastily along after
Torrance and Yarbo.

* * * * *

The old house that so long ago had been a sort of vacation home and
hunting lodge to that great-hearted gentleman, King Cannon, when first
glimpsed by Jim Torrance gave him a flick of surprise, despite what
Bill Yarbo had hinted of it. There was a small upland valley with a
round bit of a lake like a dusky mirror in its center; there was a
rushing stream pouring down into the lake; on a narrow bit of bench
land stood the building, massive and four-square, honest granite for
foundation, no less honest and rugged spruce logs for the rest of it.
Candlelight glimmered out through two or three windows.

There came a hushed bleat from Sam Pepper alternately holding back and
pressing up close to their heels.

“Listen!” he pleaded. “You damfools listen to me! Ain’t you got any
sense? Look how the place is lighted up! Say, there’s apt to be forty
men there! If we go running into that mess--well, we might’s well cut
us our own throats and save ’em the trouble!”

“Don’t listen to him, Jim,” muttered Bill Yarbo. And then in a
confidential tone, yet one raised loud enough to make sure Pepper
caught it, he demanded as though in wonder, “Why’d you bring him along
anyhow?”

“Funny they’ve got the place lighted up like that,” said Torrance. “If
it’s Bordereau, and he’s in hiding, you’d think--”

“Shucks,” said Yarbo. “He ain’t got the faintest idea that there’s
anyone on his trail. Up here, why a man might hang out all winter and
never have a nose poked in on him. We’ll take him clean by surprise.”

“You’re c-crazy!” stuttered Pepper. “Murdo’s sure warned him.”

“Come ahead, Jim,” said Yarbo.

The two started on again.

Sam Pepper stopped where he was.

“Me, I’ll guard the trail,” he said faintly. “In case anyone’s
following us, I’ll head him off.”

Yarbo laughed and Torrance grunted. Sam Pepper watched them ride on,
but himself sat where he was in the trail and shivered from head to
foot. He saw his two companions draw on closer to the house, then turn
off trail into a grove, then emerge on foot, moving on guardedly. He
was tempted then to turn and scurry back the way he had come, at least
as far as the mining camp, but the thought of being in that lonely
place all night--and of perhaps having some most unwelcome callers drop
in on him--gave him a fresh set of jitters. He dallied with the thought
of going back only as far as the main trail, then down to Pocket
Valley. But suppose he should meet Murdo and his gang coming up from
Sundown by way of the Flats?

He just shivered and stuck tight where he was.

Yet he’d have given anyhow a good left hand to know what was ahead
of Torrance and Yarbo, what they were going to find out and just how
things would happen to them.

“Maybe they’ll be dead inside ten minutes,” his dry lips whispered. His
spare shoulders twitched as he added: “Me, too, maybe. Why’n thunder
did I ever come along with two such crazy fools?”

* * * * *

Again Torrance led the way, watchful for some guard who might well
enough be posted outside. It appeared however that Bordereau, as Yarbo
had predicted, was confident that no one was likely to look in on him
here. For when the two men came stealthily up onto the front porch of
the old King Cannon mountain place and looked in at a window, they saw
that the men inside had no thought of anything but of their own affair.
There was Steve Bordereau on his feet and moving about restlessly,
carrying one shoulder stiffly yet beyond that seeming whole and
unharmed. With him were five other men.

“What’n hell are they doing?” whispered Lying Bill Yarbo. “Tearing the
house down?”

“Who are they?” asked Torrance. “Know them?”

“Sure. That little weasel Sam Pepper guessed it; somehow he’s apt to
guess right once in a while. They’re the fellers he said we’d run into.
And take it from me, Torrance, they’re tougher’n saddle leather. If it
comes along to a scrimmage, you better shoot damn fast and twice as
straight--or that little egg-sucking Pepper’ll have the laugh on both
of us.”

Bordereau’s men, under his orders, were making a wreck of the big
rude-timbered living room. With pick and crowbar and hand ax, they were
tearing up floor boards now, and had already demolished a considerable
section of one wall in a corner near the fireplace. One man, down on
his knees, was prying up stones from the hearth.

“There’s six of ’em altogether, and maybe more hanging around,” said
Yarbo. “There’s only two of you and me--”

“Better go back with your little friend Pepper,” said Torrance.

“Why, damn you!” growled Yarbo. “Me, I can handle that crowd alone and
single-handed. I was just going to say--”

“Sh! What do they think they’re doing in there? What are they looking
for?”

Sam Pepper could have told him, nailing the fact on the head; and Sam
would have been in an ecstasy of interest to mark whether they found
it or not. When this country had been filled years before with old
freelance miners, when King Cannon had come up here and looked around
and made him this place, he had grubstaked many a man, he had been a
friend to nearly all of them--and a lot of gold, both raw and minted,
had passed through his hands. Sam Pepper would have explained: “Why he
kept a lot of gold, King Cannon did, and he put it somewhere, didn’t
he? Here in this house, wasn’t it? And it’s never been found in all
these years. Somehow, Steve Bordereau’s got a hunch at last that he can
find it.”

But Sam Pepper, missing all this, wasn’t on hand to explain, and Bill
Yarbo didn’t know. He relieved himself of a ponderous, thick-shouldered
shrug.

“After all,” he suggested, “we come up here to gather Bordereau in,
didn’t we? Me, for a long while, I’ve wanted to see that bull dehorned.
Now while he’s busy, no matter what he’s looking for--”

“The door’ll be locked,” said Torrance. “If we start anything through
the window, they’ll scatter six ways, douse the glim and have us
guessing. Let’s slip around back and see if we can get in.”

“Fair enough,” agreed Yarbo, and they started to withdraw. Just then
however they were riveted in their tracks by a mighty uproar exploding
in the room on which they had only now turned their backs. There was
an excited yell in a high tenor voice, that of Joe Tortillas; there
was a triumphant, bellowing shout that came from an exultant Steve
Bordereau. And then a half dozen men were shouting like schoolboys.

Torrance and Yarbo whirled and ran back and peered in again. They saw
what the excitement was all about. Joe Tortillas was the man who had
been ripping up boards near the fireplace; he had come upon a small
wooden box, pretty well rotted away, and from it dumped on the floor
several rusted old tobacco cans--and thus proved that in old rumors
there could be a lot of truth. What gushed forth was gold, some of it
dust and knobby nuggets, some in minted coins.

“Looks like a million dollars!” gasped Bill Yarbo.-- And, oh, Sam
Pepper, where were you then?

“Looks like Bordereau’d got it for keeps,” snapped Jim Torrance,
“unless-- Come ahead, Bill! Now’s our chance! At the back door. They
won’t be thinking of anything but that King Cannon gold.”

He leaped down from the porch and ran, breaking through a deep
snowdrift at the corner of the house, and after him like a lumbering
plow horse came Lying Bill Yarbo.

They found the back door locked. They tried a window; it, too, was
fastened. They hunted farther, hoping to enter without any splintering
of wood or crash of glass. It was Yarbo who found a narrow door in a
corner and got it open. He was aquiver from stem to stern--just as
Sam Pepper shook through icy fear, so did Yarbo tremble with rage. He
muttered in his throat:

“Damn him, Jim! That belongs to Sally by rights. It might get her in
the clear again. And if Bordereau thinks for a split second--”

Again a stone-cold Jim Torrance gave him a soft “Sh!” to bring him back
to some degree of caution. It would be like Bill Yarbo to go bounding
in like a roaring lion.

“We ought to get the drop on them, Bill, but watch your step. Walk
light and have your gun ready.”

They entered directly into what had once been a large kitchen, the sort
of place where you’d expect to have the ox roasted whole, the sort of
kitchen a man like King Cannon was sure to dream into being. They saw
strips of light under two doors, both giving entrance to the living
room where Bordereau and his exultant followers were. Jim Torrance
jerked his thumb toward one of these doors, then pointed to the other,
and Bill Yarbo nodded. They’d burst in simultaneously from two points
of vantage upon seven unexpecting, loot-excited men.

Torrance stepped softly, tiptoeing, toward one of the doors. Bill Yarbo
went his lumbering way like an old bear toward the other. They had
enough light to guide them and to see each other by, due to the two
glass panels set over the two doors. Torrance began a slow opening of
the door to which he had stepped, drawing it inward toward himself.
Bill Yarbo turned a knob, had trouble because of a warped jamb, gave
an impatient tug, found that his door opened the other way, shoved at
it and--

Then of a sudden, as he remarked later, on regaining consciousness, it
seemed like all hell broke loose. Certainly these three things happened
simultaneously: The door flew open with a crack and a bang of a heavy
panel striking against a wall; the toe of Bill Yarbo’s boot caught on
the threshold and Bill plunged headlong, sprawling on all fours into
the living room--and from somewhere outside and near by there came the
rapid-fire explosions of gunfire. If every energy had been bent toward
giving Bordereau full warning that an attack was bearing down on him,
the thing couldn’t have been better done.

Bordereau experienced his instant of consternation; so did Torrance and
Bill Yarbo; not one of them had the least certainty of what those shots
outside meant.

But Sam Pepper knew!

* * * * *

Sam Pepper kept twisting his head this way and that like a little owl
sitting on a post; he wanted to watch for happenings at the old house,
and at the same time in desperate apprehension he kept watching the
trail along which they had ridden. When all of a sudden he saw two men
bulking big as they rode toward him, his heart pounded, fluttered,
threatened to stop for good and all, and the bones within him seemed to
melt. He had been scared many a time in his life but never like this!
He knew these oncomers for what they were--killers who’d make no more
of Sam Pepper than a cat would make of a mouse at breakfast time.

He wanted to scurry along to the house where Torrance and Yarbo were,
but he couldn’t move. He saw the two men closer; there was enough
light reflected from the white expanse to show him their bulky forms
and, even more clearly, the horses they rode. They were Barty Evans
and Butch Vorich, as sure as he was born, and if there were two more
merciless brutes within a hundred miles of Sundown, he didn’t know
them. He began to wilt and slide down out of his saddle. As he slid he
reached automatically for his belt gun, just as it is said that a man
will grasp at a straw.

Sam Pepper wore an old Colt forty-four that hadn’t been fired for
years; he wasn’t even dead sure that it was loaded! It was a wonder
that the thing could still shoot. Scared stiff and rigid as he was,
still there were certain uncontrollable, spasmodic jerkings of his
spare frame. A voice yelled at him; a gun roared and spat orange-yellow
flame; he was sure that he felt a lock of hair cut away.

His hands, despite the cold, were sweaty. That old gun of his got
itself into his grip, he never quite knew how. A slippery finger
slipped on the trigger. And, a wonder again, the bullet went on its way
as from a fresh cartridge. Finally, a thing that cannot altogether be
explained, an act of fate if you like--just one of those things--that
wild bullet took a man, none other than Barty Evans, square between the
small crafty eyes.

And Sam’s slippery finger kept on slipping. His gun, blazing away as of
its own accord, emptied itself--and a howl of pain shrilled through the
air as the man riding neck and neck with Barty Evans pitched headlong
from his saddle into the snow and lay there moaning and writhing and
trying to get up and falling back and lying where he fell, a black
formless blot on the white of the snow.

The gun slid out of Sam Pepper’s hand. Sam himself balanced drunkenly
as though he too had been shot, then melted from the saddle and slowly
settled down into a snow bank. He didn’t faint exactly, but for a few
moments he didn’t quite know what it was all about or where he was or
why. He felt sick.

* * * * *

He was only vaguely conscious of other shots being fired within the
house, of wild yells and scurryings. He heard more clearly a man
shouting, and recognized Steve Bordereau’s voice: “Get the hell out of
here! There’s a mob after us!” He heard a roar from Bill Yarbo, a roar
cut short off; he heard pistol shots until the world seemed to rock
with them; he heard Steve Bordereau shout again: “The gold, dammit! Get
the gold, Joe! Let’s get the hell out of here!”

And here came men rushing toward him on horseback, a hundred men he
would have sworn, though there were but half a dozen of them in all.
He cowered deeper in the snow and watched them race past; he saw Barty
Evans’ body trampled, saw stricken Butch Vorich try to wriggle out of
the way, screaming, and saw him too trampled, then lying a still black
spot emphasizing the whiteness around him. They were gone, gone with a
rush as they had come. And Sam Pepper, feeling more dead than alive,
was alone.

After a while he picked himself up and slunk into deeper shadows.
His brain began functioning again in its own peculiar way. He began
wondering just what had happened there at the house--what about Jim
Torrance? And Bill Yarbo? After Yarbo’s shout there hadn’t been a sound
from them.

So once again Sam Pepper was torn two ways. He wanted to scramble up
on his horse and get out of here on the dead run, get out and stay out
for good. Also he did want with all his heart and soul to know what had
happened at the house.

He began inching back into the trail.

CHAPTER XI

Three men lay sprawled in the house from which Bordereau had fled so
precipitately, all three looking to be dead. In fact one of them was
beyond ever stirring again; that one chanced to be Turkey-trot Smith,
shot close under the heart.

When, after no little reconnoitering, after many hesitancies and
withdrawals, little Sam Pepper at last came inching into the room still
lighted by three or four candle ends and also by a flickering light
which came from an adjoining room, he saw Bill Yarbo lying on his face
across a threshold, his gun near his lax hand, and saw Jim Torrance
lying half in and half out of another door, as still as the already
dead Turkey-trot Smith. Sam Pepper thought in agony, “Oh, my God,
they’re both dead--and me, me, I’m all alone up here!”

That flickering light from the next room impressed itself on him. He
went tiptoeing to make out what it was, who was there. It was a lively
young fire just getting well under way. Bordereau, as he ran out, had
thrown a burning candle onto a heap of rubbish in a corner, meaning
to let the house burn down behind him and thus to leave no definite
evidence to the nosey ones, whose bodies, burnt to cinders, lay on the
living room floor, nor when and how they had expired. Sam Pepper, just
in time, began stamping out the flames. He ran to the kitchen, found
two buckets of water, doused the fire with them and so put it out.
Then, slack-jawed in awe, he came back gingerly to the scene of the
indoor battle.

Two minutes later he and his kind fate were crowning him hero. His
emotions were like those of a proud conquering monarch going to his
coronal, or like those of a young girl being crowned Queen of the May.
Most definitely little Sam Pepper was “Aces.”

And he had his audience. For Jim Torrance reared up and took stock of
things, and presently Bill Yarbo rolled over and groaned and made it
emphatic that he too was still alive. Both men had been shot, Torrance
once and Yarbo twice, yet neither was in any grave danger. Sam Pepper
saw that immediately. Lying Bill, falling, had struck his head against
the door jamb and was for some few moments out cold. Torrance, taking a
bullet groovingly along his skull, had been within a hair’s breadth of
reaching the end of his earthly trail, yet would be as good as new in a
few hours. He had lost blood, he had suffered shock, but otherwise he
was unimpaired.

Both men, pulling themselves up into a sitting position, groped for
their guns, then looked in a dazed and questioning way at Sam Pepper.
Bill Yarbo, as soon as he was able to speak, began to curse the little
man. That was because, most of all, he knew that it was his own awkward
blundering that had precipitated disaster, and the words were sweet on
his tongue that strove to put all blame on Sam Pepper.

Bill Yarbo said:

“Here me and Jim Torrance has been fighting, doing men’s work, and
you--you little runaway rat! If you’d stuck with us, if you’d done your
part-- Go get out of my sight! You make me sick.”

“Here’s a dead man,” said Sam Pepper. “It’s old Turkey-trot. He’s been
shot square through the heart, looks like. Must of shot himself, huh?”

“Why, damn you!” roared Bill Yarbo in weak thunder. “It was me that
plugged him--else it was Jim-- It was me, that’s who. And you! Sticking
your head in a snow bank!”

Sam Pepper inflated himself.

“If you two boys,” he told them pompously, “had did your parts as well
as I done mine, you wouldn’t be laying here now for me to have to
tend to. I guarded the trail, like I promised. When two fellers come
storming in, Barty Evans and Butch Vorich they was, why I stopped ’em!”

“You stopped ’em? Oh, my eye!” groaned Yarbo. “You--”

“Sure,” said Sam Pepper vaingloriously. “I kilt ’em. Both of ’em.
They’re laying out there in the trail; you can go see for yourself.”

“Of all the liars I ever knew!” growled Bill Yarbo in disgust.

He managed to get to his feet and then would have toppled over in a
dead faint if Sam Pepper hadn’t run to him and helped ease his big
bulky body down onto a bench before the fireplace. Jim Torrance looked
at Pepper strangely; he had heard those shots outside and had wondered
about them. He too pulled himself up, retrieved his fallen gun,
and went staggering across the room and out through the front door.
He went weaving along the porch, lurching down the steps, stumbling
along the trail beaten through the snow by several running horses, and
came presently to the spot where Sam Pepper had experienced his great
adventure. There, black blots on the pure white of the snow, lay two
men. It was as Sam Pepper had said, and Jim Torrance, still swaying
slightly though the clear cold outside night air was beginning to
steady him, swore softly under his breath.

He stood there a while, leaning against a pine, breathing deep, getting
his head clear and his unwilling muscles under control. Then he went
on a few steps, just to make assurance doubly sure about Bordereau’s
departure. The trampled snow told the story; Bordereau and those with
him had ridden on their spurs, going somewhere else.

* * * * *

It was Sam Pepper who stabled the horses in a wreck of a shed behind
the house, and who brought their packs in and spread blankets before
the fireplace and made a roaring fire of splintered boards that
cluttered up the place. And it was Sam who made a sort of broth out of
scraps from their provision stock, bacon mostly with beans mashed up
in the concoction; and it was Sam who, despite his patient’s curses,
did the major job of binding up Lying Bill Yarbo’s wounds. Yarbo hadn’t
said much until then; he had looked his questions at Jim Torrance and
had said a bleak:

“Well? He was lying as usual, I suppose?”

Torrance leaned against the chimney and stared a long while at Sam
Pepper, then shifted a penetrating gaze to Yarbo.

“It’s the way Sam says, Bill,” he said. “He shot the two men, one
square between the eyes, the other close to the throat. Damn straight
shooting, if you ask me, with what little light there was. I found his
gun in the trail.” He tossed it to Sam. “Looks like, after he’d emptied
it, he’d thrown it in somebody’s face. If he’d had another gun, likely
he’d have got Bordereau and the whole crowd.”

Sam Pepper blushed. Bill Yarbo began turning red; he had swallowed some
unwanted pills in his life but never one harder to get down than this.

“What was happening in here, while I was heading the others off?” asked
Sam, brisk again. He looked all about him cheerfully and wonderingly.

Torrance told him. Wider and wider did Pepper’s eyes stretch open.

“With all the noise outside,” Torrance concluded, “Bordereau thought
there was a posse bearing down on him. I guess he thought he’d done for
Yarbo and me anyhow; he was burning down the house to make sure. And he
got away with Sally Dawn’s gold, enough of it, from the looks, to put
her up on easy street again.”

“Gosh, I’m a sick turkey,” muttered Yarbo. “Bring me a bed and led me
die in peace. After what’s happened tonight--” His roaming eyes rested
for an instant on Sam’s perky face; then he shut them tight. “After
what’s just happened,” he said faintly, “me, I’d ruther be dead anyhow.”

They holed up there at the old King Cannon mountain house, and were
grateful for its shelter. Sam Pepper was nurse, kitchen hand and
general roustabout. He went down to Pocket Valley for more provisions
and for odds and ends; he kept the fires burning; he ministered to
Lying Bill Yarbo when that bull of a man was delirious and threatened
to tear the house down. Torrance came and helped when Bill was at his
worst, and gave Pepper a hand with his labors. The two of them at times
talked, Sam doing most of the speculating, as they wondered whether
Bordereau and his men were clean gone for good, King Cannon’s gold
along with him.

From Pocket Valley they sent a man secretly, Andy Stock’s helper, to
carry word to Mrs. Sam, who would pass it along to Sally Dawn, that all
was well and that they would be showing up before very long. The women
were to keep their mouths shut if possible; if Steve Bordereau liked to
consider both Torrance and Yarbo wiped out of the picture, let him.

“He tried to play dead on us,” said Jim Torrance. “If we sort of do the
same for him, maybe he won’t hurry out of the country. Maybe we can
meet up with him again.”

“How much in gold do you suppose there was?” asked Sam, on edge. “A
thousand? Ten thousand? Maybe a hundred thousand?”

It was Torrance who, when he could, went out and scooped shallow graves
for Turkey-trot Smith and the two men Sam Pepper had brought to the end
of their trails; Sam wouldn’t go near them. Torrance got the job done
of a windy afternoon with a storm threatening; it did snow that night
but by morning cleared and a glorious blue sky hung over them. The
sunlight, warm and golden, fell across Bill Yarbo’s bed and heartened
him.

“Hell’s bells,” he said, “I’ll be up and around tomorrow sure.” Then
he glared at Sam who just then was departing in his chipper fashion
toward the kitchen. “That is,” he said confidentially to Torrance, but
loud enough to make sure that Sam heard him, “I would if I was fed
right instead of being shoveled out the stingy messes that lying little
lizard feeds me.”

* * * * *

“I’ve been thinking about things,” said Torrance.

The three had made themselves as comfortable in the big living room
as circumstances permitted. There was a genial fire going on the
hearth, windows had been blanketed, some of the splintered floor boards
replaced. Bill Yarbo lay in a corner on the bed they had made down for
him; Sam Pepper squatted on the wreck of an old chair, and Torrance had
humped over on the bench at the side of the fireplace.

“Me, too, I been thinking!” spoke up Sam. “Gosh, if I only knew--”

“There are some things we do know,” said Torrance. “Steve Bordereau
came here by night, went out in the dark and hasn’t come poking back;
it’s clear enough he’s still playing dead and doesn’t want it generally
known that he was ever up this way. We know, too, that he’s got quite
a gang with him; and that seems sort of funny when you first think of
it, since he is playing dead; and men do talk. Another thing is this:
Those two men that Sam stopped out in the trail were coming straight
here; they were Bordereau men; it’s a ten to one bet Murdo sent ’em
racing with word and warning for Bordereau, and--”

“Sure,” said Sam, and rubbed his hands, “that’s why I kilt the
son-a-guns!”

Bill Yarbo, who had given no sign of life, groaned. Torrance ignored
both the little man’s boastfulness and the big man’s pain at having to
swallow it.

“And so,” Torrance continued, “even yet there’s a chance Bordereau is
pretty much in the dark about what’s happened around Sundown while he
was up here. He’s not apt to know about his grave being opened and
about the stir that made at the Stag Horn.”

“That’s likely, Jim,” agreed Sam, and could not help adding, “Good
thing I did stop them two messengers of Murdo’s.”

“What I’m getting at is this,” said Torrance, frowning into the fire
and speaking to himself as much as to the others, “what is Bordereau
up to now? And why those several men with him? He’s got King Cannon’s
gold, and it looked like a sizable pot. Is he running out with it,
skipping the country while the going is good?”

“No, he ain’t,” said Sam, and sounded cocksure. “For one thing, you
said you thought you nicked him last night before they downed you;
well, that’s two pretty fresh wounds he’s carting around. Another thing
is, like you say, he’s got all those hard hombres along with him; it
means that he plans still playing dead and so playing safe, to do a bit
more hell-raising before he drifts and, when he goes, to go with all
his pockets full. He’s been down in Mexico before; well, likely he’s
headed back there when he’s made things too hot to hold him up here.
Likely he’ll buy him half the damn country and set himself up like a
king. That’s the sort Steve Bordereau is. One thing about him, Jim, he
don’t shoot nickels.”

Torrance nodded.

“That’s sort of the way I’ve been figuring it, Sam,” he said. “But
there’s this: When he does find out about Doc Taylor being found in his
grave, what then? It’s going to look to most folks like Bordereau had a
hand in that, huh? And I gather that Doc Taylor was pretty well liked.
Bordereau might do some lively stepping out of here if a lot of the
doc’s friends started looking for him.”

Yes, there were a good many things to think about, and in the silence
which shut down--broken only by the faint crackle of the fire and a
dull, rhythmic thumping of a board loose somewhere and flapping in the
night wind--they were thoughtful and uncertain. Presently Sam, who
could never be silent for long, started to say something; but he hadn’t
gotten out the first half dozen words when he leaped to his feet, his
eyes goggling, and scurried into a shadowy corner of the chimney behind
Torrance’s bench.

“Oh, my gosh!” he gasped. “What’s that?”

Bill Yarbo strove to rear up on an elbow in order to glare at him. He
was in a good bit of pain and his voice was thick and faint, yet he
managed to mutter scathingly:

“The brave little fighter and man-killer is scared out of his britches
by the wind blowing! Of all the--”

“Shut up!” commanded Torrance in a whisper. “There is something--”

All Sam’s terrors, which had left him in peace for a few hours while he
had gloated over his heroism of last night, came back to clutch him by
the throat so that he could scarcely get the whispered words out:

“It’s s-somebody trying to break in! Somebody at the back
door--t-trying to get in through the k-k-kitchen--”

Jim Torrance heard it too now and knew that Sam was right. He rose and,
gun in hand, stepped softly toward the kitchen door.

CHAPTER XII

Whoever it was trying to get in at the rear door suddenly desisted;
Sam Pepper had gone to infinite pains to make sure that all doors were
barred, all windows fastened. There was a brief silence while Torrance
cocked an ear against the slightest sound. Then he heard quiet voices,
though he could not make out the words, and after that there came a
sharp rapping.

“Well?” demanded Torrance then. “Who’s there?”

A voice answered quickly, “That you, Torrance?” And then another voice
spoke up, giving him a start, saying eagerly: “Oh, Jim! Let us in!”

Sally Dawn’s voice! And she should be safely out of all this, many a
mile away. He unbarred the door and jerked it open, and Sally Dawn
hurried in, and with her came a young fellow, lean and lanky, whom
Torrance didn’t recognize at first but presently, in a better light,
remembered as Dave Drennen, that upstanding young rancher who was
neighbor and friend of the Cannons and, if the look in his eye meant
anything, a pretty warm admirer of Sally Dawn.

“Jim!” she exclaimed. “Oh, I’m so glad! You’re all right then?”

“Anyone else with you two?” he asked, and when she said, “No, just Dave
and me,” he shut and barred the door and led the way toward the other
room. On his way he demanded, “What in thunder brings you here?”

“We got the message that Sam sent; that you and Bill Yarbo had been
hurt. And did you think for one minute that I wouldn’t come to try to
help?”

“Why should you?” he asked curtly.

“After all you had done for me--did you think--”

“Here’s company, boys,” said Torrance.

Sam had already popped out of his corner and came hurrying, the most
relieved looking man imaginable, and Bill Yarbo, also looking glad,
though his face was drawn with pain, again made his attempt to come up
on his elbow.

“Howdy, Sally! Howdy!” cried Sam. And then, “Howdy, Dave! Say, this is
great!”

Bill Yarbo muttered something. Sally Dawn, standing in the middle of
the room, her hair wind-blown, her cheeks bright with the nip of the
night air, her eyes shining, looked them all over. Longest of all did
she study Jim Torrance; she saw that his dark lean face looked haggard;
she saw that his eyes looked hard between their narrowed lids; but
she saw too that he was not as badly hurt as she had feared. Then she
hurried to Bill Yarbo and went down on her knees beside him.

“Poor old Bill,” she said gently. “I’m here to doctor you, Bill.”

“For which thank God!” said Bill Yarbo fervently. “Sam Pepper’s been
trying his damnedest to kill me.”

She laughed at him and patted his hand and then held it tightly in her
two. Bill Yarbo settled back with a long sigh.

Torrance turned to Dave Drennen.

“Well, what’s it all about?” he asked bluntly. “What are you two doing
up here? What did you let this girl come for?”

Drennen grinned.

“You try to stop her when she makes up her mind about anything she’s
got her heart set on. Try it sometime, Torrance.”

“There’s no sense she should go sticking her nose into any more danger
than she has to.”

“I’m safer right here than I’d be anywhere around Sundown,” said Sally
Dawn, and sounded triumphant.

“You are not,” said Torrance angrily. “Steve Bordereau--”

“We know where Steve Bordereau is at this minute, Dave and I!” she said
exultantly; and, by way of telling Mr. Jim Torrance what she thought of
him for the sort of welcome he had given her, she wrinkled up her nose
and put out the tip of her tongue at him. “Don’t we, Dave?” She fairly
drenched young Drennen with a smile; let Jim Torrance take stock of
that, too!

“What’s all this?” cried Sam Pepper, electrified. “What do you know
about Bordereau? How do you know where he is? And does he know--”

“Let’s have it,” said Torrance.

“And,” said Sally Dawn, still exultant and meaning to let Mr. Jim
Torrance learn that she knew a thing or two that might interest him,
“Steve Bordereau and the men with him have a lot of gold--some looking
like it had just been dug out of the ground, some in what looked like
a lot of twenty dollar pieces! And I hope they get to quarreling over
it--”

“Why, Sally Dawn!” yipped Sam Pepper. “That’s your gold, every ounce of
it! They--”

“What!” cried Sally Dawn, her eyes seeming to grow as big and round and
bright as any of those twenty dollar gold pieces.

“We’re not getting ahead very fast with anything,” grunted Torrance.
“Seems as though the more there is to be explained, the more words get
poured out and the less gets said. Suppose, young lady, that you or
Dave Drennen here tells us what you know about Bordereau and where he
is.”

She drew a deep breath and pulled off her hat and pushed the tumbled
hair back from her face. Then between them she and Drennen got their
story told.

Immediately on getting word of a part of what had happened up here, of
both Torrance and Yarbo being wounded, she had insisted on coming to do
her part; if they were hurt it was in her quarrel, wasn’t it? Drennen
had done all that any mere man could to deter her, and that was nothing
at all, so he had come along. They had taken the longer but more open
way coming up through the Flats. It grew dark when they were several
miles south of Pocket Valley. About a mile from the old abandoned mine
road they had glimpsed a light through the trees; Dave Drennen knew the
ranch with its clutter of tumble-down buildings and corrals--

“Turkey-trot Smith’s place, I’ll bet a hat!” put in Sam Pepper, and
slapped his bony thigh. “It would be just the place--”

“We didn’t see Turkey-trot, though,” said Drennen.

“You wouldn’t!” said Sam. “Jim shot him, and thereby saved Bill Yarbo’s
life!”

“Liar!” snorted Bill Yarbo, weak but not too weak to refute Sam’s
libel. “Me, I shot him and--”

“Dave told me about the place,” Sally Dawn hurried on, “and how
Turkey-trot was suspected of hiding stolen stock there, and how he and
Steve Bordereau had been thick as thieves--and we stopped and looked at
the light and got to wondering. And just then we heard somebody coming
up the trail behind us, riding hard, and we ducked into the timber and
watched for him to go by. Only he didn’t go by! He was coming up from
Sundown-way the same as we were; at a dead run he swung into the side
trail and went straight on to Turkey-trot’s ranch. And we followed him!”

Torrance withdrew his eyes from her to glance accusingly at young
Drennen. Drennen heaved up his shoulders.

“Me, I couldn’t stop her,” he muttered. “And anyhow, the way things
worked out, it was all right.”

The man whom they followed at a respectful distance, themselves making
a cautious arc through the timber, proved to be a certain fox-faced,
narrow-eyed youth whom Torrance remembered, a man named Brill, and he
went straight to Bordereau. It seemed that Murdo had sent out two men
the day before to warn Bordereau that trouble was afoot, to tell him of
the discovery in the Sundown graveyard and all the rest of that night’s
events. When no report had come back to Murdo, he had sent Brill out,
and Brill, taking the old road through the Flats, had seen the light at
Turkey-trot Smith’s and judged he’d get the latest word of Bordereau
there.

He had scarcely called out at the house and swung down and got himself
admitted when Sally Dawn and Dave Drennen, their own horses hidden
among the trees behind the barn, crept up to the rear of the house.
They could peek through a crack in a warped old shutter, could see
quite clearly what was going on inside, and could even catch a few
words.

“And we saw the gold,” said Sally Dawn. “It was in a heap on a table.
I think Steve Bordereau was keeping nearly all of it for himself, but
doling a little bit out to the others. What did Sam mean by saying it
belonged to me?”

They told her and she said thoughtfully: “Daddy used to keep a good bit
of gold on hand; he lost a lot in a bank that failed once, and after
that he wouldn’t have anything to do with banks. But we always thought
he kept it down at home, on the ranch. And so now Steve Bordereau has
that, too! Oh!”

“You say you heard part of what they were saying tonight?” Torrance
prompted her.

“Yes. That was just after Pete Brill burst in on them. He was telling
them that Murdo had sent him; he told them about you and me coming back
to Sundown and how you knew he was alive and how you brought the body
of Doc Taylor back to the Stag Horn and accused either him or Murdo
or both of the murder. Steve Bordereau was limping up and down--he
seemed to have been hurt in the thigh or side--and I never saw a man
look so furious! He began yelling your name, Jim. And he seemed to
blame me, too; he swore he’d get everything I had on earth and”--she
shuddered--“and that he’d get me, too.”

“And then?” asked Torrance coldly.

“That was about all we got to hear, wasn’t it, Dave? The men were all
excited and stirring about and one of them started toward a door and we
ran back to our horses and hurried on here.”

Torrance, who had been leaning against the chimney, moved toward the
kitchen.

“Come ahead, Drennen,” he said. “Let’s take care of your horses.”

“We brought some grain for them,” said Sally Dawn. “And for your
horses too. And we brought some food and some bandages and a bottle of
whisky--”

Torrance kept on going and Dave Drennen followed him out. A few minutes
later Drennen returned bringing the things Sally Dawn had mentioned.
She was already busy with Bill Yarbo; she gave him a big shot of whisky
and in return he gave her such a look of gratitude as one doesn’t see
often. Drennen then went out again to lend further help to Torrance
with the stock.

“He pretends his hurt don’t amount to anything,” he said from the door,
“but it sort of looks to me he’s riding on his nerve. He oughtn’t to be
out in the cold.”

“Make him hurry back in, Dave,” pleaded Sally Dawn.

But when again the door opened, it was to admit Drennen, returning
alone.

“Torrance says to tell you, Sally, you better get back to your own
home soon’s you can, and you better stay there, being as after this
you’ll be safer near Sundown than anywhere else. And he says you get
some friends of yours, men like Sam and Bill and me, about half a dozen
good men, he says, to stick close night and day. And he says put ’em
all on your pay roll and you can pay ’em out of that gold when you get
it back, and if you can’t, he’ll pay ’em himself. And he says--”

She sprang to her feet, exclaiming: “Dave Drennen! What are you talking
about? Why doesn’t Jim--”

“He’s gone,” said Drennen. “Gone hell-for-leather!”

“Gone! Where?”

“How do I know? He didn’t say. He just went.”

“Why didn’t you stop him?” she wailed.

“There you go,” muttered Drennen. He wiped his brow with the back of
his hand. “Torrance says why didn’t I stop you--you say why didn’t I
stop him! You two just try stopping each other, once, will you?”

* * * * *

Because the night was clear with frosty, glittering stars, and because
there were patches of snow where the side road turned off, Jim Torrance
was enabled to hit upon the trampled trail of many horses leading
through the woods to the Turkey-trot Smith place. Otherwise he must
have passed it, since there was no light in the house to guide him.

He rode, as Sally Dawn and young Drennen had ridden, in a wide arc
through the timber and to a place behind the old barn. Like them still,
he went forward on foot, but he did his first bit of reconnoitering at
the barn itself; it was dead still, with never the sound of a stamping
horse. He moved on to the house and stood listening; the silence
remained unbroken save for the faint rustle of wind through the tree
tops.

He went up the back steps and found the door open. After that he knew
that already Steve Bordereau, perhaps because of a new slant at things
afforded by the news brought by Murdo’s messenger, had led his men
elsewhere. Still, to be dead sure, he stepped in through the open door.
Again, after he had waited a long minute and heard never a sound,
he moved forward; he didn’t immediately strike a match, because he
thought: “If any of them are here, the dark’s all in my favor. They
won’t dare indulge in any wild shooting, and there are no friends of
mine here to stop a bullet!”

At last, however, he did strike a match; he had been on the verge of
retreating without doing so, but knew he’d never be quite satisfied
that way. As the match flared up, his first thought was, “Not a man
here.” And then he saw something, and whipped his gun over and thought,
“There’s one of ’em, sleeping on the floor.”

The man’s sleep was one that nothing on earth could ever break.
Torrance stooped over him; he lay on his back, his arms outflung,
his eyes glittering ceilingward in the flare of the match. Torrance
didn’t know the man by name but remembered his face well enough, one of
Bordereau’s followers, a burly, beetle-browed, heavy-jawed fellow who
looked stubborn and sullen even in death. He had been shot through the
head.

Torrance’s match burnt out and he did not strike another. When he
left the room he at least closed the door behind him, a thing that
Bordereau hadn’t troubled to do. He didn’t worry himself greatly trying
to figure out why this man had been killed. Bordereau’s work no doubt,
since Bordereau was undisputed leader over his wolf pack. Maybe Sally
Dawn had been right when she sensed the likelihood of a quarrel over
the division of King Cannon’s gold; this man had the look of one who
would speak up for himself. And if Bordereau had shot him in cold
blood-- Well, those others who still clung to him would be apt to watch
their steps.

In the saddle again he rode slowly, trying to pick up the trail of
the riders who had so recently departed. He found it with little
difficulty. They had cut straight back into the old road, then had
turned south. That meant back down toward the Flats, toward Sundown.

But within three or four miles all tracks faded out, because down here
there had been little snow, which had melted already, and there were
many rocky ridges and slopes on which it would be hard to find tracks
even by day. Bordereau might have ridden straight on, hammering out the
miles to Sundown or to some hide-out near town, or just as conceivably
could have turned aside somewhere along the way.

Jim Torrance didn’t waste time looking for signs which he had such
scant hope of finding, but pressed on toward his own place, which he
reached at that bright moment when all along the crests of the ridges
creating the broken line of the eastern horizon, gleaming strips of red
and gold were being spread as for a carpet for the advent of the new
day. As the rim of a red sun came up he was rapping at Sam Pepper’s
door. Mrs. Sam, already up and dressed, came bustling to open for him.

“You!” she exclaimed. “But--”

A couple of men, two of the party who had officiated with him at the
graveyard, both staunch friends of the Peppers as well as of Sally
Dawn, pushed back chairs in an adjoining room and came to the door, as
eager as Mrs. Sam. Torrance got a delectable whiff of breakfast, bacon
and coffee floating out their fragrances on the sweet morning air.

After breaking off with a “But--,” suspended in mid-air, Mrs. Sam
invited warmly: “But come in, Mr. Torrance. Breakfast is ready, and you
can tell us over a cup of coffee. I’ll bet you haven’t had one yet!”

“Thank you, ma’am,” said Jim Torrance.

Over the table he brought them the latest news. They heard him out in
utter silence, their faces tense and earnest. At the end, he said:

“Me, I’ve got a little of my own business to tend to. It would be a
good idea if several of the boys went straight up to where Sam and
Bill and Sally Dawn and Drennen are, just to be on hand. We’ve had one
storm, we might get another, and it would be tough on them, the way
they are, if they got snowbound. I don’t think you can drag Bill Yarbo
out inside a week. I’ll see you later.”

He went back to his own place and attended to his stock....

A couple of hours later the two men, with Mrs. Sam insisting on going
along, left for King Cannon’s old mountain home. When they arrived,
about the first thing Sally Dawn said was,

“Where’s Jim Torrance?”

They didn’t know.

They had stopped at his house; they found a man there he had sent out
from Sundown to care for the place. Mrs. Sam just shook her head and
said, “Gone.”

CHAPTER XIII

“Gone,” was all that any one of them could say of Jim Torrance,
and “Gone” was all that they were to know of him for many a day.
Speculation was rife: He had met up with Bordereau somewhere in the
wilderness. Bordereau had killed him and there was an end of him. Or,
he had decided that he had tackled too stiff a job, going up against
Bordereau and his gang, and had ducked out, going fast and far to
save his hide. Or, he still lurked somewhere near Sundown, playing
his lone hand, still hunting down the man he so long had hunted. Or,
after all--for what did anyone really know about him?--he was just one
of those wandering, restless figures always moving across the great
Southwest, and had merely shown up here and passed as he doubtless had
in so many other places, like a comet.

Sally Dawn returned to the King Cannon ranch, to the sprawling old home
under the oaks, and did not want for company on the way nor friends
about her when she got there. It had been a week before they made
the journey down from the mountains above Pocket Valley, for it was
that long before they dared move Lying Bill Yarbo. Now he reposed in
pampered ease in a bright bedroom at the ranch house and even began to
stir about a little, and there was always Sally Dawn or Mrs. Sam to
make him sort of glad he had been shot up. There was also, a thorn in
his side, Sam Pepper, for the Peppers had closed up their house and
moved over to Sally’s. And further there were other friends, always
two or three of them within calling distance, sometimes six or eight.
Two foot-loose young cowboys, Smudge Talbot and Curly Redmond, well
known to Drennen, had been put on the Cannon pay roll and, after two
days, were taking full advantage of every opportunity to make eyes at
their fair employer; Dick Pardee, one of the three brothers who owned
Cold Spring Ranch, could generally be found here when wanted; and Andy
Forsythe, Art Simmons and Blackie Webb, Cannon friends from nearby
outfits, were always coming and going when they weren’t just lingering.
Sally Dawn felt something rise up in her throat and had her eyes go
wet many and many a time when she saw how old friends rallied about
her as word went to them of what had happened and of the threat that a
vanished Steve Bordereau still constituted.

For Bordereau, like Jim Torrance, had somehow passed over the horizon
and into a desert of silence, leaving no sign of his whereabouts or of
his intent. About him, too, was much speculation; most men began to
contend that he had played his last card here and was gone for good.
And a good thing that would be--but what about Sally Dawn’s gold, her
last hope, that had gone with him?

The Stag Horn still flourished, in fact did a bigger business than ever
before, for there was always the chance that Steve Bordereau’s bravado
would bring him back, that the game was not yet played out; and an
intensely interested community, splitting itself fairly in half on the
rock of the Sally Dawn-Steve Bordereau situation, wanted to be on hand
when anything further happened. Murdo, denying all knowledge of the
substitution of Doc Taylor’s dead body for Bordereau’s, still operated
the two bars and the gambling rooms; Florinda still plied her trade and
fished for suckers’ dollars with her exotic lure.

Despite existent conditions, on the King Cannon ranch Sally Dawn found
herself living a more normal, a brighter life than had been hers for
many a weary day. That smoldering, smoky, sullen look was less in her
eyes now, and something of the infectious gayety came back into her
rippling laughter, and she could again tease a romantically inclined
cowboy in the same playful spirit that had been hers when she was
sixteen. A source of unfailing glee for her existed in the residence
here, cheek by jowl, of Lying Bill Yarbo and Sam Pepper.

“Don’t you love the two old humbugs?” she laughed to Mrs. Sam. “They
have to try so hard to hate each other.”

Carrying Bill Yarbo his mid-afternoon nourishment of soup and pie and
strong coffee--he was out on the porch in the mellow sunshine now,
for, with the first storm vanished and the skies blue again, a last
mild period of Indian summer claimed the land--she also bore an olive
branch. She was fully determined to be an intriguing little dove of
peace until she had her way with these two and made them in all things
the staunch friends that she suspected deep down in her wise little
heart that they were--and Sally Dawn Cannon, once she made up her mind
about a thing, was as stubborn as Barney, the old pensioner mule out in
the pasture.

“Sam Pepper was asking about you, Bill,” she said cheerily. “Do you
know that, if anything happened to you, Sam would be lost! He says--”

“Don’t tell me what Sam Pepper says!” growled Bill Yarbo. “He’s a man
I don’t want to think about. I can stomach some of his cussedness, but
leastways a man oughtn’t to lie like he does all the time.”

That tickled her so, it started her laughing so merrily, that Bill got
red in the face. From him she went, as soon as she had a chance, to
speak to Sam of his old friend Bill Yarbo.

Sam sniffed.

“Him! Pampering him, Sally, is just like feeding a rattlesnake. He
ain’t the kind you can tie to; he ain’t got no courage and he ain’t
got no stamina. I never knowed a bigger coward and quitter, and once I
knowed a man that set a trap for a bear and caught a rabbit instead and
was scared to take his game out’n the trap lest it bite him! Look how
Bill Yarbo let Jim Torrance down in that mite of a scrimmage up in the
hills! Shucks!”

Sally Dawn made a good story of all this when she carried it to Mrs.
Sam, but at the end of her recital she asked wonderingly, “Do you
suppose they both actually believe what they say about each other?”

* * * * *

It was not that sorrow and mistrust of the future did not visit the
girl during these days. On her return here, had it not been that so
many a true-hearted friend came along to chase shadows away, she must
have wept her heart out. She slipped away as soon as she could and
crept through the dusk to her mother’s grave, that pitiful grave so
hurriedly dug, so unceremoniously filled. She threw herself face down
and hugged the earth to her tortured breast; she shoved herself back
from it and beat the earth with her small clenched fists....

But a pair of shrewd and kind eyes had been upon her, and after a
little while Mrs. Sam came out to her and took her into her arms and
let her cry. The very next day a fence was built around the grave, and
Mrs. Sam said to Sam: “It looks mighty pretty out there now, Sam; kind
of bright and gay and cozy. I don’t know where she could get so many
flowers this time of year.”

Also Sally Dawn knew her times of black depression superinduced by the
vague yet still ominous threat of some further act of a lawless and
desperate Steve Bordereau, by the mess of money affairs which seemed
to make it impossible for her to hold on here much longer--and by a
troubling uncertainty concerning the missing Jim Torrance.

“Shucks, Sally,” said Mrs. Sam, her hands in biscuit dough and her
round arms floury, “you just get your mind off that roving rascal.
Fellers like him take care of themselves all right; it’s here-they-come
and there-they-go, and you’ve got enough on your mind without pestering
yourself with a lone wolf like Jim Torrance.” She brushed the hair out
of her eyes with a forearm that left a snowy streak on her placid brow
and looked sharply into the girl’s troubled eyes with her shrewd ones.
“I’d say you’re just as well off if you never see hide nor hair of that
man again. Run outside and make Davy Drennen happy.”

Sally Dawn shook her head.

“I keep worrying about him,” she said. And then she added thoughtfully:
“He’s no wolf either. He was mighty kind and gentle with me. I’ll never
forget. Why, that first night--”

Mrs. Sam sighed.

“I know, child. Well, don’t you fret any; after all, most likely he’ll
come riding back any minute.”

“Do you think so?” asked Sally Dawn. She idled around the kitchen
aimlessly a few minutes, then drifted out on the porch and stood there
a long while, looking up the long wavering white road, stretching
lonely and empty into the blue hills that were just now turning misty
in the sunset.

She was still standing there, day-dreaming, when suddenly she became
aware of something that looked like a small blue-gray cloud forming
against the tenderly flushed horizon. There had been no rains for a
week, the roads were dry and that faint blue-gray cloud was a cloud
of dust. For a single instant she tingled from head to foot; then she
relaxed against the pillar supporting the roof over the porch and
sighed. It was Thursday afternoon and time for Hank Webber to bring the
stage, rocking and rumbling, down from Bridgewater to Sundown. There
had been the time when the stage itself--with its speeding horses,
with the mystery it always was, what with its unknown passengers and
mail and, perhaps, money box--had fascinated her. Today she had not
the least interest in stage-coaches. But then she did not know that
Hank Webber was bringing to Sundown word that would put Jim Torrance’s
name on many a tongue that night and keep it rolling there with one
implication or another for days.

“All hell’s busted loose up around Mountain City,” said Hank as he
booted his brake on in front of the Sundown House. “Three stick-ups in
three days, the Mountain City Bank, the Rock Valley Mine and the Yellow
Pine Lumber Company. Four men killed already, two-three more bad hurt,
and nary a one of the raiders gathered in. It’s a gang’s work, six or
eight or ten of ’em, riding masked and shooting fast and straight;
they’ve got away with some says fifty thousand and some says a hundred
thousand dollars--and everybody says the man that’s leading ’em is Jim
Torrance.”

The news inundated Sundown in a swelling tidal wave of excitement.
Bridgewater was but sixty miles away; Mountain City lay but a score
of miles southeast of Bridgewater; both the Rock Valley Mine and the
Yellow Pine Lumber outfit were within less than a half day’s ride on
horseback from Mountain City. The result was that many men hereabouts
had friends and acquaintances in the newly raided district, and
presently the names of those who had been ruthlessly shot down were
added to the news which Hank Webber and Will Banks, the guard who rode
with him, had brought.

By the time word of this back-tracked along the stage road to reach
the King Cannon ranch, Sundown was eddying into a turmoil. There
were hard-eyed, angry men vowing that this was all the work of Steve
Bordereau and that Jim Torrance had nothing to do with it; there were
other men, those who had come to group strongly about Clark Murdo,
who lifted voices no less strong and challenging in placing the onus
of the whole affair where the first rumors had already put it, at Jim
Torrance’s door.

“There’ll be fights over it tonight,” said Curly Redmond, who had raced
back to the ranch with the news, “and it’ll be lucky for them that
mixes in ’em if they’re only fist fights!”

“How do they dare say it was Jim Torrance?” cried Sally Dawn hotly. “As
if anybody knew! If the men were all masked and all got away--”

“That’s what I wanted to know,” answered Curly, “and I asked all over,
and at first nobody could guess at it any better’n I could; and then a
feller told me that he heard Phil Moody say that Hank Webber said--”

“Just about what I expected!” sniffed Sally Dawn sarcastically. “What
nice straight proof of anything!”

“Hold on, Sally,” cut in Dave Drennen. “Anyhow let’s get what Curly was
going to say. Go ahead, Curly.”

“Well, I don’t know anything about it, but they say Hank said that
at the bank hold-up, the bandana that the leader of the raiders was
wearing slipped, and a man that was standing in the bank and skipped
into a corner saw the robber’s face, and he said it was a man he used
to know. He said it was Jim Torrance.”

Sally Dawn flared out. “It’s a lie!” Save for that single exclamation
from her the little group which had gathered in the yard was hushed.

“Then there’s something else that they’re saying in town,” Curly went
on. “At the Rock Valley Mine there was a sheet of paper stuck with a
knife to a door. One of the big shots at the mine was killed; his name
was Connoly; and on the paper it said, ‘Connoly did me dirt once, and
this is what he gets for it.’ And it was signed with Jim Torrance’s
name.”

Mrs. Sam patted Sally Dawn’s shoulder.

“I reckon that ought to let our Jim out,” she said drily. “He might be
a robber all right, but he ain’t fool enough to do a thing like that.”
And Sally Dawn caught her roughened hand and squeezed it with all her
might.

But when she slipped away to be all alone and sat in a place that had
been a favorite dreaming and brooding spot since childhood, where a big
flat rock stood up commandingly from the hillside back of the house,
and when she let her eyes traffic with the far-away stars, and the hush
of night over the wide range lands was over her, she asked herself,
“What do I really know about Jim Torrance?” She clung to the fact that
he had been good to her. But how many and many a time had she been
afraid of him? His face seemed to take form between her eyes and the
sky and to come closer and to grow clearer; she could see again those
hard, dark eyes which gave glimpses of mystery and perhaps of menace
through the narrowed lids, and his mouth that at times frightened her,
it could become so cruel and savage.

She jumped up and hurried back to the house, eager for companionship.

Rumors, rumors and rumors--they flew as swift and erratic and dark and
elusive as night hawks. Sometimes they dealt with Steve Bordereau;
they had him everywhere, on both sides of the international border.
For the greatest part they bruited Jim Torrance’s name about. Again,
he had fought with Bordereau and had been shot to death; he had been
seen gambling for high stakes at High Crest; he had had a run-in with
a sheriff of Morongo County and had been gathered in and had escaped;
he was leading a bandit band, all killers, down near Nacional; he was
headed back toward Sundown. Those were the tales a-wing, and there were
many more of their sort--until at last a cleancut and definite word was
brought of him.

It was Sam Pepper this time who brought the news out to the ranch from
Sundown, Sam Pepper wild with excitement, thumping his heels into his
horse’s flanks, beginning to shout through the dusk long before a word
could be made out. So by the time he scrambled up onto the porch to his
swiftly gathering audience, he was so out of breath he could hardly
gasp out what he had to say.

“Now, Sam,” said Mrs. Sam sharply, “you go easy a minute and get your
breath, else you’re going to bust a boiler, and I’ll be a handsome
young widder woman and will up and marry Bill Yarbo. We ain’t going to
run away, and whatever you’ve got to say will most likely keep.”

“J-Jim T-Torrance!” stammered Sam. “He--he--”

Sally Dawn, not in the least patient like Mrs. Sam, pounced on him and
caught him by an arm and began to shake him. Then Sam got his story out.

“There’s been another hold-up, the biggest of the lot. Over to Canyon
City. The biggest bank in seven counties. Cleaned out. I don’t know
how many men was killed--but they say they nailed the boss robber this
time. They say it sure was Jim Torrance. They say he’s shot all to hell
and was left behind for dead--that he’s dying now--most likely dead
by this time. And down in Sundown, Clark Murdo is serving free drinks
and--”

He stopped for air. For a long, still moment no one said a word, but
eyes went from Sam’s puckered face to other eyes and they were all
alike in their expressions, all alike in that they stared out from
under frowning brows. All, that is, saving Sally Dawn’s alone.

Hers were wide with horror. Her lips were parted; she had started to
say something but had not spoken. The color seeped out of her cheeks
until they were white.

“Sally--” said Mrs. Sam.

The girl whirled and ran into the house; they heard the door slam.

“Better go look after her, old lady,” Sam said to his wife. “Seems as
though she’s hit hard; seems as though she’s sort of took a liking to
this Jim Torrance.”

“Leave her alone,” snapped Mrs. Sam. “She’s all right, that girl is.”

Very swiftly Sally Dawn showed them just how all right she was. She
came back, out onto the porch, pulling on a pair of gauntlets. In this
short time she had jerked off her house dress and gotten into riding
breeches and boots; she had a sweater over her arm and a little hat
jammed down emphatically over her curls. The color had come back into
her cheeks; there were twin hot spots in them and her eyes were shining.

“Sally!”

“Saddle me a horse, will you, Dave?” said Sally Dawn, as cool as “Good
morning.”

“But where on earth--” began Mrs. Sam, only to be cut short with Sally
Dawn’s counter question, “Where do you suppose?”

“But--”

“Will you saddle me a horse, Dave? Or will you, Curly? Or shall I?”

“It’s fifty mile--” expostulated Mrs. Sam.

“I don’t care if it’s five hundred!”

“And it’s almost dark--”

“Oh!”

Sally Dawn made a dart for the steps. Both Dave Drennen and Curly
Redmond were galvanized; both sped away to the corrals. And what was
more, when her horse was saddled, their two horses were saddled along
with it.

CHAPTER XIV

Jim Torrance lay flat on his back in bed--and he didn’t know in what
bed or in what house--and he didn’t even know that he was in any bed
at all. He opened his eyes and looked about him dully, puzzled yet not
greatly concerned. Then he strove to move slightly and was so wrenched
with pain that an involuntary groan parted his pallid lips.

A face bent over him. He saw it only vaguely, an unfamiliar face of a
middle-aged woman, one that looked above all other things capable. Old
Doc Kibbee, of Canyon City, whenever he had a patient who demanded the
best to be had in nursing, sent for Nancy Hamilton. And Nancy Hamilton
now leaned over Torrance and put a calm, steady hand on his forehead
and said gently yet in the tone of one who commands:

“There now, just you lay still, Mr. Torrance. You’re doing fine.”

“I don’t know who you are--I don’t know where I am,” he muttered, and
closed his eyes and let his head loll to one side. She stepped to a
table for a bottle and spoon and glass, but a glance over her shoulder
showed her that his eyes were closed, that he was either asleep again
from sheer exhaustion and weakness and the shock of pain, or was dying.
Efficient and practiced as she was, there were times when she couldn’t
tell. She went back to her rocking chair and dropped down heavily into
it; she herself was haggard, worn out, her eyes thumbed deep into their
sockets from all she had gone through since she had been sent for.

The man in bed lay still a long while, existence become for him a sort
of gray haze twisting into a thousand misty labyrinths. He had moments
of semi-consciousness but nothing mattered, nothing that had happened
or that they did with him. He swallowed the liquids that were forced
between his teeth and lay inert for long periods, neither awake nor
asleep. The doctor came and went, and he knew of the visits but was not
greatly concerned. Doc Kibbee talked aside with the nurse; he did not
even try to listen.

He went to sleep and slept deeply for two solid hours; Nancy Hamilton
sank gratefully deep down into her big chair and relaxed. She too
slept. But when he awoke, there she was standing over him, saying:
“Just you lay still, Mr. Torrance. You’re doing fine.”

He nodded this time. Either something they had given him or his rest
made him feel stronger; his head was clearer, he thought.

Again he slept. Again he woke. This time he stared up in puzzled
fashion, a heavy frown of concentration dragging his black brows down.
He began to grow confused; he guessed his head hadn’t cleared after
all. For the nurse had changed miraculously. Just now she had been a
capable looking middle-aged woman. And here she was young and flushed
and very bright-eyed and incredibly pretty, and she looked just exactly
like Sally Dawn Cannon.

He closed his eyes an instant. Sally Dawn was as still as a mouse. He
opened them quickly as though to catch the nurse at her tricks if she
was trying any funny business on him.

“Sally Dawn!”

“Sh! You’re not to talk.” She stooped closer and for a fleeting second
her cheek was against his on the pillow, her curls making him intensely
aware of their softly brushing caress. “Jim!” she whispered.

“But look here--”

She stood erect, rosier than ever, and put a finger ever so softly on
his lips.

“Your nurse is resting; she said I could sit with you a little while if
I promised to call her if you wouldn’t just be quiet and rest.”

She always thought of his eyes as being narrowed, as though he were
forever on guard, watchful and suspicious and hard. Now she saw them
open up wide, quite as though they had to do that to take her all in,
and she discovered that they were not absolutely night-black, but that
there was a hint of warm brown in them. She smiled at him and patted
his hand; his fingers curled slowly and with the gentlest pressure
about hers....

Sally Dawn had already had a talk with Doc Kibbee, a chubby,
pink-cheeked, hearty old fellow with snow-white mustache and imperial
and sharp, wise eyes. She had commanded anxiously, “Tell me about him!”

He had hunched up his thick, round shoulders.

“How should I know? Me, I’m not much of a doctor anyhow. He’s been
shot close up and lost some blood; he was hammered over the head from
behind by a club or a gun barrel, and first I thought he might have a
fractured skull. ’Tain’t so though. That’s what I’m always doing with
patients of mine until they up and die on me--making mistakes and--”

“Doctor Kibbee! Don’t I know all about you? You’re the finest doctor
that ever was! You--”

“What do _you_ know about me? I never saw you before!”

“But you did! You were a friend of King Cannon’s, weren’t you? For
years and years? Well, I’m his daughter.”

“My, my!” he said. “You, King Cannon’s kid!”

“Now tell me! And tell me the truth about him.”

“Hm.” He stared at her and appeared to consider. Then, very gruff about
it, he shot his own question at her: “What are you all warmed up about
it for? Happen to know this Torrance?”

“Of course I do! That’s why I’m here. He--he’s the finest friend I ever
had!”

Her words didn’t please him. He snorted at her.

“You’re a little fool, that’s what you are. All you young pretty girls
seem to be infernal damn fools sooner or later about some no ’count,
and most generally it’s sooner. Know who and what he is--and how come
he’s shot up the way he is?”

“I’ve heard a lot of crazy rumors--”

“Rumors, my eye! He’s one of the gang that held up the bank right here
in Canyon City, that killed Phil Gates, the cashier, that’s made off
with Bill Hasbrook, the bank president, and has probably cut his throat
long before now and thrown him down in a gully somewhere. That’s who
your friend Torrance is.”

“Why, Doctor Kibbee!” she gasped at him. “If anybody’s an old fool--”

“If you call _him_ a friend,” he cut in bruskly, “you just go and get
down on your knees and pray he dies in bed. Most likely he will anyhow,
being that he’s a patient of mine. That’s what happens with me right
along. Just as sure as he gets well enough to stand the shock, the boys
are going to hang him good and high.”

“They won’t! They mustn’t! Oh, can’t you see it’s all just a horrible
mistake?”

* * * * *

After her visit with Torrance, which lasted two hours, with him
sleeping most of that time, she had a few words with Dave Drennen and
Curly Redmond whom she found waiting for her outside the little house
in which Jim Torrance was hospitalized. They looked unhappy, both of
them, and uncertain; they shifted their boots in the dust of the road
and looked furtively at each other rather than at her. Her little chin,
which was emphatic enough at times despite its lack of ruggedness and
square lines, came up.

“I know,” she said tartly. “You’ve been over at the saloon having
a drink--and you got to talking and asking questions and getting
answers--and you believe all they tell you. Oh, you make me sick!”

“It’s tough, Sally, and sorta hard to take,” said Dave doggedly. “But
there’s no use trying to dodge facts. There was a hold-up, there were
men killed and a bank robbed--and he’d been off and away with his crowd
only he got dropped and left behind. He’d have swung for it before
now, only the boys up here can’t see anything in hanging a man while
he’s unconscious first and so damn near dead next. They’re just giving
him time. You better come home.”

She pointed to the squat, sturdy building next door.

“That’s the jail, I suppose?”

“Yes, it is, Sally; and he’d be in there now, only the sheriff--”

Sally Dawn smiled at the two boys very sweetly, so sweetly indeed that
both began shifting uneasily again.

“Thank you, boys, for having brought me over,” she said. “You can go
home now if you want to.”

“Oh, hell,” said Curly Redmond, and Dave silently concurred as Sally
Dawn headed straight to the jail.

“Drink, Curly?” suggested Dave Drennen.

“It’s an idea,” admitted Curly gloomily.

* * * * *

In an untidy little office cozily close to the strongly barred room
which served Canyon City as its jail, Sally Dawn found the county
sheriff. He was a man of equal vintage with Doc Kibbee, which is to say
somewhere around sixty, and looked like something carelessly hacked out
of mahogany. He was mahogany-colored and wore habitually a perfectly
wooden lack of expression; he had enormous black eyebrows which looked
artificial, great tufts that might have been stuck on for a masquerade,
a heavy, uptwisted, black and impossible mustache and a clean-shaven,
ruthless, square chin. Even his eyes looked false, they were so steady,
and bright and expressionless as shoe buttons.

His boots were cocked up on top of a table littered with papers, which
gave her the impression of having gathered there undisturbed for years;
and along with the litter were an empty ink bottle, a couple of rusty
pens, an ancient Colt forty-four, with neither hammer nor trigger,
which served as a paper weight, an old long-roweled Mexican spur and
a serviceable Winchester thirty-thirty. A good bit of this detail so
forced itself on her that she took it in with one flick of her eager
eyes; after that she saw only the man.

“You are Sheriff Evans?” she asked.

She smiled at him as at an old friend.

He remained utterly motionless, not so much as a ripple stirring him;
she couldn’t even see that he breathed. Certainly he did not take his
feet down from his table, nor did he remove the broad black hat that
was already pushed as far back on his head as it would go, nor for a
long moment did he speak. He was looking toward her, whether at her or
not, and was perhaps continuing a chain of thought her entrance had
interrupted--provided of course he was even thinking.

At last he said in a quiet, low-toned voice, “Yes.”

“I came to talk to you about Jim Torrance. He--he is a friend of mine.”

She waited for him to speak; he didn’t. He didn’t have anything to say;
in his turn he waited for her to speak.

“He’s not a bad man,” she said with a passionate fervor that put a
quiver into her voice. “He’s not a robber. He didn’t have anything to
do with that bank hold-up; I know he didn’t!”

Sheriff Evans didn’t say anything one way or the other. Sally Dawn,
already so overwrought with anxiety, flared up with anger.

“Do you hear me?” she cried hotly. “Do you hear me? Why don’t you say
something?”

“What’ll I say?” he asked.

“Say--say anything! Don’t just sit there like a--like a-- Say that you
don’t believe me, if that’s what you think.”

“I don’t believe you. Jim Torrance is as guilty as hell. I’d have him
here in jail right now only I’m hoping, give him the best of care, to
do two things. One is, get him to talk. The other is, hang him.”

“How do you know that he is guilty?”

“He was one of the gang that robbed the Canyon City Bank. One of ’em
that killed Phil Gates, the cashier. One of ’em that made away with
Will Hasbrook, the bank president. One of the gang that got away with
thirty thousand dollars that day--only he didn’t happen to get away.”

“You were there? You saw it all? You saw him--”

“Nope. I wasn’t there. Tom Long was, though; Tom’s a deputy of mine. He
got shot, Tom did, and’s a right sick man now. But he shot Jim Torrance
before he went dark.”

Sally Dawn whirled about and went to a dingy window and made pretence
of looking out, an utter impossibility, considering the unwashed state
of the windowpane and the watery blur that came into her eyes. She
stood with a small fist clenched, gnawing at her knuckles, biting at
them to keep the tears back, to keep from bursting out hysterically.
Presently in a very small voice, without turning, she said, “You’re
not very sympathetic, are you, Mr. Walt Evans?”

“No. Not with any friend of this man’s. Happens Phil Gates was a friend
of mine. Happens it’s the same with Will Hasbrook. Happens--”

“Happens you ever had any other friends? Happens you ever knew a man
named King Cannon?”

“Hell’s bells!” said Sheriff Evans and sounded almost, not quite,
human. “What about King Cannon? He’s been dead years now.”

Sally Dawn turned slowly and looked him in the eye.

“Happens I’m his daughter,” she said coolly. “Happens, when I was a
little tyke, you and Doc Kibbee and Daddy--”

Walt Evans’ feet came down off the desk then like something hurled by
an explosion, and he surged to his feet as quick as any boy, and his
battered old black hat came off his head with something next door to a
flourish--all this pretty much in one gesture.

“Sally Dawn Cannon!” he exclaimed, and sounded altogether and warmly
human. “Well, I’m damned!” He looked at her with new eyes; he put out
a big leathery paw and caught her hand and came close to breaking the
bones in it. “And at that I might have known! I always said you’d grow
up into the prettiest girl that ever sprung a dimple. Why, you little
devil! Come here to me!”

He gathered her into his arms, lifted her clean off the floor and
kissed her.

“Will you offer me a chair now, Mr. Evans? And will you let us talk
together?” It was a flushed, breathless, and very eager Sally Dawn
speaking.

“I heard about your good mother--”

“Don’t! I can’t talk about that. Not yet! And there are other things
that happened down at Sundown--”

“Yes; I heard about some of them, too. Just garbled gossip, that’s all
I got. I was going down to see you-- Dammit, I haven’t been down that
way since your old man died, have I? I ought to be kicked-- Want to
tell me about all these happenings?”

“Yes! That way I’ll be telling you about Jim Torrance, all I know about
him, and then-- Well, _you’ll_ see!”

Long before she had finished, old Walt Evans was frowning and tugging
at a lower lip, and his eyes, from being merely bleak, grew wintery,
the sort of winter that now and again lights up to a flash of lightning.

“You’re one hell-of-a-lot like your old man, Sally Dawn,” he said
soberly. “He was a man you could tie to, and somehow, kid that you are,
I’d like to string all my chips along with you. Maybe you’re right as
rain--and maybe, just being a girl and having a man like Jim Torrance
look at you, you’ve got your heart, God bless it, all mixed up with
your brains.”

“No!” said Sally Dawn, knowing what he meant. “No! I tell you this is
all Steve Bordereau’s work, and that Jim Torrance is out with all he’s
got to break Bordereau down, and somehow he’s got caught wrong in the
thing that Bordereau has just pulled off.”

“Maybe,” said the sheriff. “Maybe. Only it looks bad. It looks so bad
that, while I’d rather cut off a thumb than go against you, I’m as
sure as Billy-be-damned that this Torrance has made a sucker of you.
Here; look at this. Nobody but you and me knows a thing about it; I’ll
ask you to take a look at it and then forget it. That means, keep your
mouth shut.”

She nodded, he thought, just the way old King Cannon used to do, and
a nod from that old boy was worth as much as reams of legal phrasings
with signatures and seals and notaries’ stamps affixed.

From the pocket of an open, sagging vest he pulled a folded sheet of
paper. He gave it to her and stood back, watching her read the few
lines:

Dear Walt: They’ve got me, and it’s going to be up to you whether I
get out alive or not. They’d cut my throat in a minute. So, Walt,
hold your hand. It’s ransom, of course. I’ll be sending you another
note in a day or so. Don’t try to follow the man who brings it; don’t
do anything. Just wait. They hold the cards, and I’d rather pay than
kick off. This is damned serious, Walt.

Yours,
Bill Hasbrook.

P.S. They left one of their men behind, pretty badly hurt, I think, a
man named Jim Torrance. Hold on to him; give him the best of care; I
guess they’ll want him sent back to them along with some money; he’s
the boss of the gang. If anything happens to him, they say the same
thing will happen to me. Watch your step, Walt.

Bill.

When she had finished reading, “Now what?” said Sheriff Evans.

“I--I don’t understand,” said Sally Dawn in a small voice.

He put his big hand very lightly and sympathetically on her shoulder.

“It’s kind of easy to understand, Sally,” he said gravely. “This
Torrance sort of stands out; he’s not the common run; he’s born to be
a leader. What he is is the head of this gang. You can’t get away from
it.”

“He isn’t! I know he isn’t! He--he is fine, Walt Evans!”

And in answer Sheriff Walt Evans leaned comfortably on those two
good old Western Crutches, saying, “_Sure_, Sally Dawn, _sure_.” But
nonetheless he had his mind made up, and she knew it. And her own
mind was terribly unsettled. This letter from Hasbrook, president of
the bank, a captive to the bank robbers, a man being held for ransom,
seemed to come straight from the shoulder; and he said, “He’s the boss
of the gang.”

She didn’t know what to think--but she did know what to do. She was
going to stick by Jim Torrance through thick and thin, as he had stuck
by her when her need was sorest. She went straight back to his bedside
and there she meant to stay.

Sheriff Walt Evans went back to his chair, hoisted his boots up on top
of his untidy table and read Hasbrook’s letter all over again. Sally
Dawn would have been greatly surprised if she could have known just how
that shrewd old brain of his was ticking. He started wriggling the
toes in his boots; it must have been to them that he spoke when he said
softly:

“He called me ‘Walt’ four times in this damfool letter. And he signed
himself ‘Bill.’”

CHAPTER XV

“Good morning, Mr. Torrance,” said Sally Dawn.

“Good morning, Miss Cannon,” said Jim Torrance.

“It’s a lovely morning. And you’re looking just fine.”

“It’s more than a lovely morning. And you’re lovelier than any round
dozen of lovely mornings. And--”

“You’re feeling--”

“Like being on top of the world. Ready to jump up and go prowling. Like
singing you a song. It goes like this:

“‘Oh, hand me down my high-heeled boots,
And hand me down my hat;
And hand me down my long-tailed coat,
Likewise my silk cravat.’”

She laughed at him and wrinkled up her nose in the way she had, and he
grinned at her and, for about two minutes, the world was a mighty nice
place to live in. Then he started frowning.

“Pain?” she asked solicitously.

“Yes. The worst one I’ve had yet.”

“Where, Jim?”

“In my conscience. You’ve been doing too much for me. You’ve come all
this distance and you’ve stuck here until you’re worn out. I want you
to go home and get years of rest. I’ll ride down and see you later;
I’ll bring you all my thanks then and--and a pinto pony.”

So she laughed at him again. His frown went away and his grin came
back, but behind the grin, lurking in the dark depths of his eyes, was
a sober thought. He said, looking at her steadily:

“I’ve been sort of sick. I’ve heard things said while I lay here, and
they didn’t matter and most of the time didn’t even make sense. But now
I’ve got to think ’em over, and--”

“Convalescents are not supposed to think,” said Sally Dawn. “It’s
against the law.”

“Tell me this: In Canyon City, who are the two best friends?”

His hand had stirred slightly; hers sped to a meeting with it like a
little dove coming home.

“We are, of course.”

“Right. And as I remember it, a friend can bank on a friend. Now tell
me this: What’s wrong?”

“Wrong? Why--why, just that you’ve been hurt--”

“No. The way Doc Kibbee looks at me, the way the sheriff digs into
me with those old fish-eyes of his--even the way Nancy Hamilton
handles herself--dammit, the way that even Sally Dawn Cannon does
sometimes!--all this has got me wondering about something.”

“About what, Jim?” she asked, getting ready to be brave.

“We’ll forget it. But there is something you can tell me: Why hasn’t
Hasbrook dropped in?”

“Hasbrook?”

“Yes. Bill Hasbrook, the bank president. He hasn’t been in at all, has
he?”

“I haven’t seen him.”

“Why? Where is he?” She started tucking her chin down, as though she
could hide behind it, and he demanded sharply, “Well? Where’s Bill
Hasbrook?”

“I’ve heard that he isn’t here. That he had to go away somewhere.”

His eyes grew more penetrating, began to grow suspicious.

“What about Gates? The cashier, Phil Gates?”

“Jim! They told me that you weren’t really to talk; not about anything
that mattered, anything that might possibly upset you. And if I let you
talk, Mrs. Hamilton will come in and send me away.”

“I hear tell they’ve got a sheriff up here in Coconambo County, that
is a sheriff,” said Jim. “You, up and around, maybe might know? It
would be kind of nice if he would drop in on me and say hello. Think he
might?”

She didn’t want to say yes and she didn’t want to say no. She had never
endured such a troublesome moment in all her life. But she had to look
him in the eyes, so did his eyes insist on it, and at last she said:

“Yes. He will come to see you right away.”

He squeezed her hand.

“Thank you a lot, Sally Dawn,” he said.

Then, when she had darted out, with little delay Sheriff Walt Evans
came stalking in. He said, as crisp as a new-baked biscuit:

“Well, Torrance? I hear you want to see me.”

“Squat, Sheriff,” said Torrance. “And tell me.”

“What’s on your chest, Stranger?” asked the sheriff, having drawn up a
chair.

“Where’s Hasbrook? Why hasn’t he dropped in to ask me whether I was
dead or alive?”

“Hasbrook? He ain’t here right now.”

“What about Phil Gates?”

“He ain’t here either. Happens he’s dead.”

Jim Torrance thought that over. Phil Gates had been very much alive not
so long ago, and to be dead now meant that he was out of luck when the
bank hold-up was pulled off and bullets got to roving wild. He didn’t
have to ask Sheriff Evans. But he did have to swing back to Hasbrook,
the bank president, and ask about him.

“What about Hasbrook?” he asked. “Let’s have it all, Evans.”

“Maybe you don’t know?” said the sheriff.

“No. I don’t know much of anything. Somebody hammered me over the
head--”

“And a good job, too! That was a deputy of mine, a feller named--”

“Hell with his name! It ought to be John W. Jackass. Tell me about
Hasbrook. They didn’t kill him too, did they?”

“You wouldn’t know, would you?”

“If I knew I wouldn’t be asking. Let’s have it. Is Hasbrook alive or
dead?”

“Pretty much alive,” snapped the sheriff.

The man in bed filled his lungs; for a moment he had pretty well
stopped breathing.

“Tell him I want him,” he said. “Tell him to get a move on. I’ve waited
long enough. Get him here on the run.”

“No can do, Torrance. They’ve nabbed him. That gang of yours is holding
him for ransom. Maybe you didn’t know that, huh?”

Torrance stared at him.

“Say it again. What gang of mine? What in hell are you talking about?”

“You’ll be telling me that you didn’t have anything to do with the
hold-up? Just an innocent bystander when the job was pulled off?”

“You think I had a hand in that? That I was one of the crowd that stuck
the bank up, killed Phil Gates and grabbed Hasbrook?”

“There’s not a man in Canyon City who doesn’t know it. What do you take
us for anyhow? Blind men or just plain fools?”

“Both!” growled Torrance, and sounded downright disgusted. “Good Lord,
man, I went to Hasbrook and told him to watch out for this very thing;
I had a hunch that this was going to happen and--”

“I guess you did,” said Evans drily.

“And now Gates is dead and Hasbrook is gone--and your crazy deputy
plugs me--and you figure me for one of that crowd of rats! Haven’t you
got the sense of a little gray seed tick?”

“Maybe you know who the stick-up gents were?” said Evans, very
sarcastic.

“Of course I know! It’s a gang of Sundown killers led by Steve
Bordereau.”

“And you knew ahead of time that they were going to pull off this job?”

“No, I didn’t know. But I know Bordereau, I have an idea of what’s in
his head, and it was an easy guess he’d strike here. His crowd is the
same one that stuck up the Yellow Pine, Rock Valley and the Mountain
City Bank. They’re out to make a big killing before they blow; and it
was my guess that Canyon City would be next.”

“Just a wild guess on your part then, huh?”

“It wasn’t so wild, was it? And now you’re doctoring me, working to get
me on my feet again, just to throw me in jail? That it?”

“There are a good many boys around here,” said Evans, “friends of
Hasbrook’s and Gates’, that don’t think much of the jail idea. Maybe
I’m going to have my job cut out, as soon’s you’re able to get around,
to keep them from taking you off my hands.”

“Little hanging party?” grunted Torrance.

“Your guesses keep right on being good.”

Torrance lay still a while and stared at the ceiling.

“You think I’m lying to you, do you?”

Evans shrugged heavily.

“I just wish I knew, brother,” he said sourly.

That was about as far as they got at that time. But a couple of days
later the sheriff dropped in again. This time he found Torrance
dressed, sitting on the edge of his bed, looking gaunt and weak but
with a clear, bold eye.

“Let’s talk, Torrance.”

“Shoot. What’s new?”

From his pocket the sheriff drew a couple of folded sheets of paper.
One was that communication from Hasbrook which he had already shown to
Sally Dawn. Jim Torrance read it carefully, then read the second note
which Evans handed to him with the remark: “This one just got to me
today. I don’t know who brought it; it was shoved under my door last
night.”

When Torrance had finished reading it also there were spots of color in
his cheeks showing a dull angry red through the dark stubble of beard,
and his eyes were bright and hard. The words that Hasbrook had penciled
were:

Dear Walt: You’ll have one more letter from me in another few days,
inside the week anyhow. Meantime I want you to raise fifty thousand
dollars in cash and have it ready against demand. That’s my ransom
money. Instructions for delivery will come in my last note to you.
And there is one other thing and, Walt, I’m depending on you for
this. The boys who are holding me have learned that Jim Torrance is
alive and getting well, and they insist that he be returned to them
the same time the money is sent. As I wrote you before, he is one of
the crowd and their leader. I know you won’t want to let him go, but
if you don’t send him back to his men they swear they’ll do me in
even if they lose the ransom. I feel sure I can depend on you, Walt.
So long.

Bill Hasbrook.

Jim Torrance didn’t speak immediately; he rolled a cigarette first and
lighted it and sat there, staring for a while at the floor, then into
Sheriff Evans’ gimleting eyes.

“Bill Hasbrook,” said Torrance at last, “is a dirty rat. On top of
that he is a--”

“Never mind all that,” cut in Evans. “Hasbrook’s a friend of mine; he’s
the squarest man you ever heard a man tell about.”

“Is that so? Why, a skunk wouldn’t come near him! He’s two things I
hate, a sneaking cur of a coward and a double crossing sidewinder.
After I went to him and put him wise, after I chipped in with him and
damn near got myself killed in the mixup, look what the yellow louse is
doing to me! Just to save his own dirty hide, he’ll be tickled pink to
have me slaughtered. And I thought--”

“Easy, Stranger! What’s he doing to you, after all, but just save you
from jail or hanging here, and send you back to your own men?”

“He knows better than that, and you’d know too, if you had sense enough
to pound sand through a knot hole!” said Torrance hotly. “I tell you,
that’s Steve Bordereau’s gang. Bordereau wants to have the fun of
butchering me, and Hasbrook knows it.”

Evans made himself a cigarette, yet did not for an instant withdraw
that penetrating gaze of his from Jim Torrance’s angry face.

“Take it from me, Torrance,” he said evenly, “Will Hasbrook is no
coward, and he’s no crook; he’s known over a good many miles as a man
you can tie to.”

A queer, puzzled look came into Torrance’s eyes.

“That’s what I thought,” he muttered. “I’d heard his reputation; I
had a few good talks with him. Dammit, I’d have bet my life on that
man--and I guess that’s what I did.”

“Yes, a man could bet his life on Hasbrook playing square,” said Evans.

Torrance got up and stirred about the room restlessly; then he came
back and leaned on the head of the bed and looked down curiously at the
sheriff’s hard-bitten face.

“You’ve got the name of being a square shooter too, Evans,” he said
thoughtfully. “And I’d say you are. Suppose you tell me the truth about
this bank president; how long have you known him?”

“Not very long,” said Evans. “Only about forty years.”

“And he’s neither a coward nor a crook?”

“The squarest. An old friend of King Cannon’s, if that means anything
to you. And not afraid of all hell on wheels.”

“That’s how I made him out. And here he is, caving in to those bums,
paying a ransom and letting them make a monkey out of him.”

“Well, maybe he figures he’d rather be alive than save that fifty
thousand.”

“And you feel kind of sure that he isn’t the sort of man to save his
own hide by letting another man take his place? A man who he knows
played square with him?”

“Is this a cigarette I’m smoking? Might be a pipe, might be I’m not
smoking at all but eating a watermelon! I’m just that sure.”

“Damn it then! He didn’t write these letters at all! They’re forgeries!
I tell you there’s something phony about them!”

“He wrote ’em all right. I know Will’s hand-of-write; know it as well
as I know my own hat.”

“Then--”

“I’ll tell you one thing,” said Evans sharply. He stood up and tapped
Torrance on the shoulder. “Will Hasbrook wrote these letters, and just
the same you’re right; there is something damn phony about them. It’s
a little thing, but it’s something that hit me in the eye right off,
and that stands out a mile after a feller does notice it. Here, squat;
you’re looking white around the gills. I’m going to tell you something.”

Torrance came back to the bed and sat down. It was Evans’ turn to walk
up and down for a while; his brows were dragged down in tangled thought
and he was taking his last moment to consider all angles of a puzzle
before he committed himself. Then he shrugged and stood in front of
Torrance and spoke his piece.

“Look here, Torrance, maybe I’m the idiot you’ve called me, but I
believe every word you’ve said to me. That’s partly because of what
Sally Dawn Cannon told me; partly from sizing you up for myself; partly
now for something in Hasbrook’s letters that makes me hunt around for
just the sort of a queer set-up you’ve told me about. Like you said,
there’s something phony here, and Hasbrook’s been to a lot of trouble
to tell me so, and he’s figured it was up to me to find out about
things.”

He put the two letters, spread out, on the bed.

“Look at this first one,” he said. “He calls me ‘Walt’ four times in
it! And Will Hasbrook never called me ‘Walt’ in his life. Everybody
else does, but since we were kids he’s always called me Walter. And
I’ve always called him Will--and I guess I’m the only man in the county
that ever called him anything but Bill Hasbrook. And now look at the
second one. He’s got three ‘Walts’ in that. And both of ’em he’s signed
‘Bill.’ And if he’s not trying to fly some sort of signal for me I’m
all that you’ve called me.”

* * * * *

By the time Sheriff Walt Evans left, Jim Torrance was ready to crawl
back into bed and just lie there and try to be patient about getting
stronger. They had gone into a conference, planning ways and means,
that had lasted a solid two hours.

What was more, they had cooked up their plan that had enough hazard in
it to have claimed all Torrance’s thoughts as long as he lay awake.
But, as a matter of record, he wasn’t thinking of this present problem
at all but a vastly more pleasant one. He was wondering when Sally Dawn
would pop in again.

CHAPTER XVI

The third letter reached Sheriff Walt Evans four days later. He
found it, like the two others, stuck under his door. He brought it
straightway to Jim Torrance, whom he found, early in the morning, up
and about and devouring a man’s sized breakfast. He tossed the fresh
news onto Jim’s table and started prowling up and down the room.

Torrance read it to the neglect of a sort of Tower of Pisa made of rich
brown buckwheat cakes.

Dear Walt: Be sure you get these details straight: You are to hand
Jim Torrance over to his friends tomorrow night. They don’t want you
to let him know what you’re doing with him; the boys want to have
their fun and give him a surprise. So you’ll put him on horseback
after dark; you’ll have him tied down to the saddle; you’ll tell him
you’re taking him to some other jail to make sure his gang doesn’t
pour down and get him free. Also, you’re to stuff the fifty thousand
into his pockets. Got all that, Walt?

Next: You and Torrance, alone, ride out on the Bear Creek road about
seven miles, to where the trail cuts up over the mountain to the old
Sun Dodger’s place. When you get up to the mouth of the pass you’ll
tie Torrance’s horse to a tree, make sure he’s tied down hard in the
saddle, and you’ll back off down trail. Got that straight, Walt?

You’ll wait there for me. I’ll be with you right away. I’ve fixed
things with these boys so that I know I’ll be all right if you just
do what I say-- Walt, old man, my life depends on you and I don’t
want to die. Walt, for God’s sake, do as you’re told. This whole
thing is getting me down.

Bill Hasbrook.

Evans, watching Torrance read, said curtly: “Well, you’d take Will
Hasbrook for a yellow skunk, wouldn’t you? And that’s just what he
ain’t! They couldn’t get him down if they took out their pocket knives
and started to skin him. And here again he calls me ‘Walt’ all over the
map.”

“And I’m to be tied up good and tight,” said Torrance. “No gun on me,
of course. As Hasbrook puts it, ‘The boys want to have their fun and
give him a surprise!’”

“He says for tomorrow night,” said Evans. “Going to be strong enough
for that sort of ride by then? Anyhow ten miles.”

“Sure,” said Torrance. “That part of it’s all right. But do you think
it’s possible that Hasbrook has tried to write in anything else between
the lines? And that you’ve missed it?”

“I’ve read every one of his notes forty times,” growled Evans. “I know
damn well that his ‘Walts’ and ‘Bills’ are stuck in to give me a high
sign. Beyond that I can’t get an inch. He might mean I’m just to stall
along and pay no attention to anything. Or--maybe--”

“He might mean that you’re to talk things over with me, just as you
have done. That business of having me tied down in the saddle, just for
fun, makes you pretty sure what Bordereau’s game is, I guess!”

“We start out a little before midnight, Torrance,” said Evans. “That’s
for tomorrow night. You better take things easy today. Will says we’re
to wait for him up at the mouth of the pass; we’ll do that.”

“There’s the chance, of course, that they’ll be hid in the brush and
burn us down--”

“Nope. If he hadn’t been sure on that point, Will wouldn’t have written
the way he did.”

“I’ll be ready,” said Torrance.

That afternoon Doc Kibbee, who had had a good talk with the sheriff,
came in, looked Torrance over, grunted and went out.

Later Sally Dawn ran in.

“Jim Torrance,” she said, “you look as good as brand-new again. You’re
about ready to ride, aren’t you? You’re to come back home with me, you
know, and get a good rest there. Mrs. Sam will feed you and--”

“Sally Dawn,” said Torrance, “you just travel along back home today,
and you tell Mrs. Sam to start in roasting chickens, baking cakes and
making pies, for just as sure as you’re alive I’ll be dropping in on
you mighty soon. I’ve got a thing or two to tend to here first, and--”

Sally Dawn looked at him sharply.

“If you had said you’d promise to come ‘Just as sure as _you’re_ alive’
it would sound more like you meant it,” she said unhappily. She put
an impulsive hand on his arm. “Jim Torrance, you and Walt Evans are
cooking something up. You’re back on Steve Bordereau’s trail, aren’t
you? Why can’t you just forget he ever existed? He’ll be up and away,
out of the country for good after this.” She pleaded; her eyes and her
softened voice were beseeching. “_Please_, Jim.”

“Take that back, Sally Dawn,” said Torrance gravely. “I don’t want you
to ask me, ever, anything I can’t do for you. Take it back, Sally Dawn!”

Sally Dawn turned abruptly and went to the window, giving him her back
to look at. He looked at it and waited. Then she turned again and came
back to him, and somehow it struck him that she was marching like a
little soldier with drums beating and flags flying.

“I understand, Jim,” she said very softly, and there was only the
vaguest hint of a quiver upon her red lips, though no tremor came into
her steady voice. “I don’t blame you, Jim. I’ll go home now. There’ll
be roast chicken and cakes and pies and--and I’ll be waiting, Jim
Torrance.”

She darted out of the room then, as swift as a swallow, and it was
not ten minutes later that Jim Torrance, out on the porch in the weak
October sunshine, saw her and Curly Redmond and Dave Drennen swoop by,
riding out of Canyon City, headed south. She didn’t wave good-by, she
didn’t even turn in the saddle. He pulled off his hat and stood with it
turning slowly in his hands until the three riders were out of sight.

* * * * *

The next night between eleven o’clock and midnight Torrance and Walt
Evans rode out of Canyon City headed toward Indian Mountain and the
old Sun Dodger’s place and the high pass across the ridge. There was
a packet tied to Torrance’s saddle strings; in it, in gold and bank
notes, was fifty thousand dollars. Torrance’s hands were on his saddle
horn and there was a rope about his wrists. Also there was a rope about
his ankles and under his horse’s belly. You would have said that he
was bound hand and foot; that he was unarmed; that he was still the
helpless prisoner of the sheriff of Coconambo County.

It was a clear night and there was a moon, and the mountain ridges
stood up sharply defined against a star-strewn sky. It was a fair bet,
both men agreed, that from the time they rode out of the dark alley
behind the livery stable they were being watched. They were equally
aware of the fact, as they left Canyon City behind them and struck into
the road that was like a long winding slash through thick timber, that
a rifle might crack at any minute and a storm of bullets knock them out
of their saddles. They were at Steve Bordereau’s mercy, and Bordereau
was merciless. Just the same, they banked on Will Hasbrook.

“I know damn well,” said Evans, “that Will wouldn’t have let us in for
this without somehow being pretty sure we’d make out. I don’t see how
he figures it, but a man can gamble on Will Hasbrook and on his keeping
his head. Just the same-- Look here, Torrance, if you want to back out
while you’ve got the chance I can’t say I’ll blame you. If I’ve got you
right, if you haven’t lied me blind, this may be the last night you
ever get a good look at the stars.”

“We’ll play out our string, Evans,” said Torrance.

Before they were a mile on their way, a rider, coming on after them
from Canyon City, overtook them and passed on. He called out, “Hello,
Jim! We’ll be waitin’ for you and glad to have you with us again.” They
could make nothing of his face, lost in the shadow of his hat.

For an instant the sheriffs hand hardened to the butt of his old
walnut-gripped Colt; then he sighed and relaxed in the saddle.

“Nothing we can do about anything until we get to the rendyvoo,” he
said disgustedly, “and most likely damn little we can do then. Looks
like they had us with our noses shoved down in the dirt.”

“They’ve got the edge on us,” conceded Torrance coolly. “They’ve got
us guessing more or less, and they’ve got the odds on us. That’s all
they’ve got.”

“Good Lord, man! Ain’t that a-plenty?”

“Just the same,” Torrance went on, “you never quit on a proposition
just because it was an uphill pull, did you?”

Sheriff Walt Evans of Coconambo County swore fluently. At the end he
said:

“Damn if I don’t sort of like your style, Torrance. And if they get
your hide tonight I’ll do my level damnedest to sort of even things up
with them later on.”

“Fair enough,” said Torrance.

They rode on in silence. The road under their horses’ scampering hoofs
started abruptly climbing up Indian Mountain, winding in and out of
graded ravines, and they had to pull down to a swinging walk. Torrance
said: “That hombre took a look-see to make out whether I was tied up
or not. They’ll have some more spies posted along the road, sure as
shooting. And I’m here to bet you we meet up with them quite a spell
before we get to the place where Hasbrook said we were to come.”

High up on the flank of the mountain they struck into a road that
ran almost level in a high valley, and here they rode hard and were
watchful and suspicious. Every shadow might be a man with a rifle at
his shoulder; the place was lonesome enough for that sort of thing.
But they shot across this bit of mountain meadow without anything
happening, dipped into another canyon and climbed steeply again. Then,
startling them, with their nerves already at stretch, a voice shouted:
“Hello, Jim! Like old times come again, huh?”

“Damn ’em, they make my flesh creep,” snorted the old sheriff.

“They’re having them their fun,” said Torrance.

“We ought to be there in ten-fifteen minutes now, Kid,” said the
sheriff, and for the first time sounded uncertain and uneasy. “If I was
you-- Dammit, Kid, if I was you-- Oh, hell, I dunno! But if you want to
turn tail right now and get the hell out of here, headed back where we
just came from, me I wouldn’t blame you.”

“We called for cards; let’s play the hand out,” said Torrance. And
after that, if he was ever going to have need of a friend, all he’d
have to do would be send word to the sheriff of Coconambo County.

Then it wasn’t long before they saw what they recognized as a signal
to halt. In the middle of the trail where there was an opening through
trees, and where the moon and stars made the place bright, a freshly
skinned pole stood upright, based in a nest of stones, and from the top
of the pole a scrap of white cloth drooped and fluttered in the draft
of night air down through a cut in the mountains. They reined in when
they first saw this mast and flag, something like fifty yards before
they came to it. Beyond, so straight-as-a-string was the trail right
here, they could see an open distance of perhaps twice fifty yards.

“If it comes to fighting it out, Kid,” said Evans in an undertone, “I’m
with you.”

“No,” said Torrance, and though he too spoke almost under his breath
his tone sounded savage. “No change of plans now, Evans. You get
Hasbrook out of this if you can; all I want is Bordereau.”

Then they saw three mounted men moving slowly out of the timber ahead
of them and coming toward them down trail. Evans called out sharply:

“That you, Will?”

“Yes, it’s me, Walter,” answered the banker.

“You’re to come ahead alone,” the sheriff called back. “Those coyotes
with you know they can take your word, and I know they’re a pack of
liars whose word is no better than rotten eggs.”

Another voice spoke up. Jim Torrance felt a tingle run through his
blood as he heard it; he recognized it beyond a doubt as Steve
Bordereau’s.

“You, Evans!” the voice called. “You’ll do as you’re damn well told,
or the gun I’ve got jammed between Hasbrook’s shoulder blades is going
off; and there’s a rifle trained on you now that will zip you into
kingdom come.”

“No, by the Lord!” yelled back an angry sheriff. “You’ll do as I say
now. Send Hasbrook down alone to me and let the two of us ride out
of this, and you’ve got my word for it your money is tied to Jim
Torrance’s saddle strings. If you don’t like that, kill Hasbrook and
try to kill me and be damned to you.”

“Is that Torrance with you?”

The three oncoming riders had stopped.

“Yes. It’s Jim Torrance. I’ve done my part; you do yours and do it the
way I say, or else.”

Then one of the three horsemen came on alone, and Torrance and Sheriff
Evans made out that it was banker Hasbrook. Bordereau called out again,
not waiting for Hasbrook to reach the sheriff’s side:

“Evans! You give me your word you’ve got the money with you?”

“Yes.”

“Is Torrance tied or free?”

“As if you didn’t know already! He’s got ropes on his wrists and on his
legs, if you call that being tied. The money’s on his saddle; I’ll drop
it into the trail or leave it there. But you’re to let me and Hasbrook
get down trail to the bend before you come on. If you boys had rather
prove yourselves the bunch of liars I’ve called you and would rather
shoot it out, hop to it.”

“Leave the money where it is,” said Bordereau. “Tie Torrance’s horse to
a tree like I said. Then get to hell out of here.”

“Here goes,” said Evans.

Hasbrook came on. By the time he had reached them, Sheriff Evans had
used the tie rope on Torrance’s saddle, an end of which was already
around the horse’s neck; the other end he tied and drew tight with a
jerk around a young tree. Then for a moment or two Torrance and Evans
and Will Hasbrook were together, no Bordereau man in sight but the two
up trail, and they a good seventy-five yards away. Hasbrook, grasping
Evans’ arm, said sharply:

“Dammit, Walter! Haven’t you and Torrance talked? Hasn’t he told you--”

Torrance in a savage undertone cut in:

“We’ve made our plans, Hasbrook. You do what Evans says. What Bordereau
says, too. Get the hell out of here.”

“I’ll do nothing of the kind! Leaving you tied like this? They’ll
murder you in two minutes!”

“Hey, there!” shouted Steve Bordereau. “What are you birds talking
about? Break it up and scatter for home--or else, like Evans says.”

Evans muttered, his voice in Hasbrook’s ear: “He means business. I’ve
done all I could with my eyes shut, Will. Now you do as I say. We’re on
our way.”

Hasbrook called softly to Jim Torrance: “I don’t get this. Until hell
freezes solid I’m with you, Kid.”

“Ride then,” snapped Torrance. “Now.”

Their hushed conference was so short that when Evans sang out to
Bordereau, “All right; me and Hasbrook are on our way,” it was before
Bordereau even called a second command. Evans whirled his horse and
spurred down trail, gone at a run, and with him went a reluctant
Hasbrook. The two vanished around the bend in the trail.

Bordereau and the man with him came on then, riding at a slow trot;
Torrance could see the metallic gleam of the rifles they carried. He
saw also something else, for those narrowed and watchful eyes of his
were everywhere at once, as they had to be, did he mean to go on living
even a few minutes. He saw a third member of Bordereau’s party; this
man stepped out from under the trees almost at his side. He carried his
belt gun in his hand and was not six paces away when Torrance heard his
soft tread and made him out, close enough to assure himself that Evans
had done a good job of tying the free end of Torrance’s tie rope about
the tree; close enough to see the rope about Torrance’s wrists. He
called out, laughing:

“Come ahead, boys. He’s tied up tighter’n a drum.”

A shout and a big booming laugh broke from Steve Bordereau then, and he
and the man with him came on at a swinging gallop.

“Now!” thought Jim Torrance. “Now!”

CHAPTER XVII

As Sheriff Evans and Banker Hasbrook rode down trail and around the
bend, Evans slipped a hand under his coat, dragged out two hefty
forty-fours and slid them into Hasbrook’s eager hands.

“I hope you get a chance to use ’em tonight, that’s all,” growled an
unusually disgruntled sheriff.

“Me too, dammit,” growled Hasbrook.

Just then two men rode out into the trail in front of them, and one of
the two called sullenly as Evans and Hasbrook pulled their horses down:

“You’re to keep on going, and go like hell. Got it?”

“Got you,” snapped Evans, and started to ride on.

But already Jim Torrance had muttered to himself, “Now!” That was
uptrail and around the bend, and they couldn’t see him for the trees.
Nor could they see Steve Bordereau and the man riding with him, nor the
other man who had just stepped out so close to Torrance.

Torrance, having said “Now!” meant “_Now!_” Bordereau and the man with
him wore big bandanas over their faces, for masks; they’d kept their
faces hidden all the while from Will Hasbrook. But as they pulled in
close to where Torrance waited for them, Steve Bordereau jerked the
cloth away from his face. Already he saw Torrance’s hands on the saddle
horn, and saw too the rope about them.

But there was something he didn’t see. The rope about Torrance’s
horse’s neck went just so far and was pieced out with a bit of cotton
string; the ropes about Torrance’s legs were pieced out in the same
way, as was the rope about his wrists. One jerk, no more emphatic than
that with which Steve Bordereau snatched his handkerchief away, was all
he needed to set him free.

“Got you at last, damn you!” exulted Bordereau. He reached in leisurely
fashion for his gun. “You’re a dead man in ten seconds, Torrance.
You’ll live just exactly long enough to know who burned you down. Take
this--and like it!”

“Hold it, Bordereau,” said Torrance quietly. “Me, I want to tell you
something too. I felt sure down to my boots that it was you and your
gang pulling off these jobs, bank robbing, murder and such. Now I know
from seeing you and listening to you. Here’s a tip for you. I don’t
think you’ll live through the night; if you do you’ll be where you put
Doc Taylor before your whiskers grow long enough to shave two-three
times.”

Bordereau hardly heard him out before he started shooting, and not
ten paces away. But Torrance, whom circumstances forced to make his
final, revised plans in a hurry, wasn’t in the saddle when Bordereau’s
finger hardened to the trigger. Knowing that he could never hope to go
free on horseback, he spilled out of his saddle, breaking the little
cotton strings that bound him, throwing himself against the fellow
who had just stepped from the wood, knocking him endwise. Torrance’s
frightened horse leaped and reared and lunged, and in the narrow trail
caromed flank to flank against Steve Bordereau’s mount.

By that time Bordereau was firing as fast as he could, not caring in
the least if he knocked over his own man, tangled there on the ground
with Jim Torrance, not caring much about anything, just so Torrance was
one man he killed. But in his excitement and rage he had the poorest
of luck; Torrance was firing back with less excitement, with more
precision. As he threw himself from his horse’s back his gun was in his
hand; he brought it down smashingly on the head of the man against whom
he catapulted himself; thereafter he did his level best to make an end
of Bordereau. But three horses were rearing and snorting their fear,
and trying to run away, and, close as the men were to each other, it
was hard to make sure with any single shot.

But he came mighty close to making sure with the first bullet he winged
on its way; it carried Steve Bordereau’s hat away and left a bloody
groove along Bordereau’s scalp. The gambler, emulating his enemy,
went down out of the saddle in a hurry, keeping the reins in one
hand, getting behind his horse, and he kept on firing from behind his
restless barricade as fast as he could pull a trigger.

He did kill his own man, the one whom Torrance had downed; Torrance
heard the thud of the impact in the lax body, thanked his stars for
the eight or ten inches between them, and leaped into the dark of the
wood bordering the trail. Bullets were singing all about him, the other
bandit slamming lead at him as fast as did Steve Bordereau.

Bordereau too sprang nimbly out of the open trail, ducking behind a
tree. The fellow with him was slower of wit or of bolder mettle; in
any case he stopped one of Torrance’s bullets and went to the ground
headlong. By that time, above the crash and thunder and clamorous
reverberations of gunfire, rose Bordereau’s voice, choking with anger,
yelling savage commands:

“Varney! Billings! Where the hell are you? Get into it or--”

Varney Slack and Hen Billings were the two men he had set on guard
lower down the trail, to make sure that the sheriff and Hasbrook
were on their way; for at the time of cooking up his plans Bordereau
hadn’t counted on Torrance bursting his bonds like this. And just now
it happened that Varney and Billings had other matters to attend to
beyond listening to their leader’s commands. For the instant Walt Evans
heard the start of a duello of gunfire, he chose to consider that his
contract with these rats was fulfilled and that he was a free man to do
just what he damn well pleased. He grabbed a gun up out of its holster
where it rested so loosely, yelled downright joyously, “Stick ’em up,
you two, or go for your guns!” and cut loose. For he saw they were
doing what they had to do; they were going for their guns.

If there was one thing--and there were several--that Walt Evans could
do pretty close up to the fine edge of perfection, it was shoot on the
draw true to the mark. He unlimbered before either of his two opponents
got their guns up six inches from their holsters; they should have
shot from the hip and taken their chances that way, for no other
chance was to be granted them. He shot one man through the throat, the
other man through the gun elbow. And Will Hasbrook by that time was in
action; he drilled with a lucky shot the fellow whom Evans had merely
wounded.

Then the two went storming back uptrail.

“Hey there, Jim!” and, “Torrance! Torrance! We’re with you!” yelled
Evans and Hasbrook. And Bordereau, hearing and understanding what must
have happened when he heard the shooting around the bend, got into
the edge of the forest, dragging his horse along, and got up into his
saddle and left behind him only the faint sound of his cursing and the
livelier racket of brush crackling under his precipitate flight.

Out in the clearing was a rock some five or six feet high. Torrance
with a single leap seemed somehow to be on top of it. From there he
shouted so that his vociferations were like the challenge of a crowing
cock. That was because already he tried to see into that thing that
they call the future--into happenings which, yet unborn, might come out
this way or that.

“Bordereau!” he shouted, inviting a bullet and feeling in his heart,
standing high just then, that he could dodge it! “Bordereau! You’ve
run off and left your fifty thousand! And I’ve scared you out of the
country, me, Jim Torrance! Hell with you--since I know after this
you’ll never come back! Me, I’ll own this whole damn country a year
from now; and you--you’ll be down below the border with the rest of the
half-breeds, sucking eggs for supper, hungry and dirty and lousy and
down and out. And it was me, Jim Torrance, that ran you out.”

And for full measure he simulated rollicking spontaneous laughter.

That extravagance of his nearly cost him his life--but since it was
merely a case of nearly but not quite, he didn’t in the least mind.
Steve Bordereau heard his taunts and stopped and shot at him through
the uncertain region of twigs and shadows and moonlight, and his shots
whistled close but left Torrance unscathed. Nor, after having fired his
verbal volley, did Torrance choose to linger on the rock. He spilled
down again, almost under the running hoofs of the horses bringing Evans
and Hasbrook.

“There’ll be sure to be more of the rats hid in the brush,” he sang out
warningly. “Better duck for cover among the trees.”

“I don’t see you ducking,” snorted the sheriff.

Torrance’s horse had run but a short distance uptrail and stood there
stamping and whirling and jerking its head high, making a lively jingle
of bridle chains. Torrance ran forward, caught up the reins and went up
into the saddle. Then there was a crashing in the underbrush where he
had vanished, going after the already vanished Bordereau. Close behind
him came both the sheriff and Hasbrook. And now Hasbrook, though he was
not going to hang back when the others led, called out a warning:

“You’ll never get him at night in this rough country--he knows every
step of it--look out or he’ll let you have it before you ever see him.”

Torrance didn’t stop and didn’t bother to answer. He knew that
Bordereau still fled on somewhere ahead, for he heard the drumming of
speeding hoofs. But he had to swing this way and that among the trees;
his horse balked once where a big fallen tree lay across the way; he
had to draw back and ride around it--and then all sounds of the horse
ahead of him died away. He stopped and listened; the trample of Evans’
and Hasbrook’s horses, coming closer, was all he heard.

“Let him go, Torrance,” said Evans bruskly. “You’re no sorrier than I
am to have him slide out on us--but we’ve saved Will’s fifty thousand
dollars for him--and we’ve done what we could to square things for Phil
Gates, potting two of the devils. And tomorrow I’ll come back up here
with a posse and comb these mountains--”

“You got two of them?” said Torrance. “Well, Bordereau himself got a
third man, plugging wild at me. If we haven’t busted up his gang, at
least we’ve thinned it. And I guess you’re right; it’s about all we can
do for tonight.”

Evans said to Hasbrook: “This man Jim Torrance is barely up out of bed;
he got himself shot up a bit in the scrap when they grabbed you. It’s
time we rode home with him and tucked him into bed again. Let’s catch
up these horses running free, and be on our way.”

“Torrance,” said the banker warmly, “if it hadn’t been for you--”

“Let’s ride,” said Torrance.

No posse went out the next morning, but just a couple of men with a
buckboard to haul back into town the three dead bandits. That was
because the sheriff and Will Hasbrook had had a good long talk with Jim
Torrance.

“It’s a funny thing,” said Hasbrook, “how Jim here seems to sort of
know what Bordereau’s apt to do next, what he’s thinking even. He
came to me and told me to look out for this raid, and I did--well,
half-heartedly maybe, still I did feel in my bones that he knew what he
was talking about.”

“How come?” demanded Evans. “You and this Bordereau bird had lots of
heart-to-heart talks, Jim?”

“Nary a talk, Walt. But you see, I know the sorts of things Steve
Bordereau has been pulling off for years; I’ve done a lot of thinking
about him; I’ve got a hunch I know what he’s like inside and how he
figures things.”

“I heard you yelling after him when you stood up there on that rock
last night. You figured he was on his way at last, clean out of the
country.”

“That was just my way of inviting him to hang around a little longer,”
grinned Torrance, and looked vastly good-natured and hopeful. “After my
reminding him that we still had his fifty thousand, and after my doing
a bit of big-mouth bragging, there’s no more chance of his running
out on us than there is of the world falling apart. If he never does
another thing, he’s going to have a try at me.” His grin passed swiftly
and his eyes darkened and grew low-lidded and moody. “You see,” he said
thoughtfully, “Steve Bordereau is three things by nature. He’s a crook
and a killer--and a gambler. He’s sure by now that his luck is running
high.”

“After last night?” said Hasbrook, puzzled.

“He’s got a gang with him, hasn’t he? And he’s raked in several sizable
jack pots already, hasn’t he, grabbing King Cannon’s gold, sticking up
the Yellow Pine and the Mountain City Bank and the Mines? Last night he
lost a trick, yes; but at the same time he had the good luck to have
three of his followers put out of the running; he’ll grab their share,
won’t he? But then you don’t know Bordereau.”

As it happened, both men did know him, though but slightly; both had
sat in at a poker table with him. They understood.

“And what next?” demanded Evans.

“First, there’s Bordereau on the run in the mountains. You know damn
well you could hunt him until the next snowstorm and never catch a
glimpse of him, not up there in the rough country. And after snow
flies, what then? He’ll be well provisioned; he’ll have a snug
hide-out; it’ll be in a place where one man can hold off fifty. And
he’ll still have a few men with him.”

“And you think he won’t do what you said, duck out for south of the
border?”

“Not if I know him. He’ll count noses of what’s left of his party, pick
up another three or four of the same kind, and try his luck again while
he still thinks that luck is running high.”

“And you’ve got a notion where he’ll strike next time?”

“Sure I have,” said Jim Torrance.

* * * * *

They talked the thing out for hours. Then, when Torrance headed back
toward Sundown, Sheriff Evans and Banker Hasbrook rode with him. And,
to meet them at Sundown, went another old-timer of Canyon City, Doc
Kibbee, traveling by stage. Those three, Evans and Hasbrook and Kibbee,
just about ran Coconambo County in those days and had done so for
many years. True, Sundown was over their county border and, rightly
speaking, they had nothing to say about how little Sundown behaved or
misbehaved itself; yet it remained that the influence which these three
hearty old mountain lions could exert extended through many channels
and to considerable distances.

“We’ll come swooping down on Sundown like the wolf on the fold,” said
Doc Kibbee.

The three horsemen came abreast of the main gate to the King Cannon
ranch just about sunset. Both Evans and Hasbrook cocked an eye at
Torrance; his face was without expression and he was staring straight
on ahead, giving no sign that he knew where he was.

“How about turning in here for a while?” said Evans. “The folks might
even feed us. Me, I’m getting hungry and sort of thirsty too.”

“It’s an idea, Walter,” said Hasbrook.

So they turned in at the ranch wagon road, and rode up to the house
on its knoll among the trees. Sam Pepper, loafing out by the chicken
yard, saw them and came with all due haste to meet them.

“Say, it’s you, Jim Torrance!” he exclaimed. “Say, here I been
wondering-- Wipe my eyes if it ain’t Walt Evans! And Bill Hasbrook with
you! Say!”

Then Mrs. Sam, hearing them, came bustling out of the house, dough
on her hands and her arms all floury--and, while they were all just
shaking hands and saying the first howdys, Sally Dawn made her
appearance, sweet and fresh in a pink dress and with pink in her cheeks
and violet in her eyes.

The visitors were pressed to have a snack and something cold to drink
and remained for a hot supper. There came a time when by chance Jim
Torrance and Sally Dawn were alone in the early dark on the porch. They
strolled down into the yard.

“There’s so much left over yet that you haven’t told me, Jim,” said the
girl.

And he said: “Instead of saying a whole lot more, I’d like to ask you
something. Between my ranch and the upper end of your ranch there’s
only the old Harper place, and the Harpers have been dead ten years and
the ranch is pretty well going to the dogs. What would you say if I
bought the place in? We’d be neighbors then.”

“Lovely! Only--only, Jim, I’m not sure that I’ll be here much longer.
The ranch is so badly crippled--and what with the mortgage on it and
with Steve Bordereau making all the trouble he can--and--”

“Shucks, those things are bound to get ironed out smooth, give ’em
time. And don’t forget Bordereau owes you a hatful of money, all that
free gold he dug out of your father’s old house up in the mountains.
When you get that back--”

“_When_ I get it back!” she said ruefully, and shook her head.

“You’re going to get it back. You’re going to keep your ranch, too; all
clear and cleaned up. Steve Bordereau thinks he’s riding high, wide and
handsome right now, but don’t let him fool you.”

“And you, Jim? Do you know, sometimes I think if you just forgot all
about him, if you just settled down to your ranch, your horses--”

“That’s what I aim to do,” said Torrance. “Right here close to Sundown.
I kind of like it here.”

“I’m glad,” said Sally Dawn.

Then he said, almost rough about it: “Look here! You came all the way
up to Canyon City when I was hurt. You--”

“Hi, Jim!” called Sam Pepper. “That you?” He came along hastily. “Are
you sure it was Bordereau stuck up Canyon City? Think he’s skipped the
country or’s coming back? And what’s brought all those Canyon City
big bugs, Evans and Kibbee and Hasbrook, down here so far off their
stamping grounds? And--”

“I wonder why somebody hasn’t killed Sam Pepper long ago,” said Jim
Torrance to the girl.

That made her laugh, and she said, “He makes me wonder, too!” But she
gave Jim’s hand, so lingeringly withdrawing, a good tight squeeze.

Supper done, the Canyon City big bugs rode on into Sundown, Jim
Torrance with them, and they did not go unaccompanied. Sam Pepper was
on hand to ride neck and neck with the first of them; Bill Yarbo showed
up and went along; Curly Redmond and Dick Pardee and Dave Drennen were
also of the party.

Within twenty-four hours that hard, tight nucleus of determined men
turned a new page in Sundown’s history. They looked up old friends;
they talked cold turkey. The second night some four or five score of
the squarest-shooting, hardest-riding men of the community met in the
“Hall.” The yellow light of their coal oil lamps shone on grim-jawed
faces. They sent out for the man they wanted, and Biggs was brought in
before them, Rufe Biggs, the town marshal.

Seth Hathaway, an old stock man of the King Cannon type, spoke to him.

“Rufe,” he said, “there’s two kinds o’ folks in an’ around Sundown.
There’s folks like us men here; there’s folks like Steve Bordereau and
Clark Murdo and their crowd. Steve Bordereau put you where you are
and our crowd ain’t got any more use for you than a grizzly’s got use
for feathers in his tail. Bordereau’s a killer, a crook, a stick-up
gent, and he’s on the run. Clark Murdo’s just as bad and won’t be here
always. If you, Rufe, have got as much sense as a bedbug, which I
doubt, you’ll resign right here and right now. _Sabe?_”

Rufe Biggs bristled and did his small amount of unconvincing
blustering, but he looked frightened, and in the end he slammed his
badge of office down on the floor and kicked at it.

“Hell! I quit,” he said, and got out of the room the quickest way.

Then the men gathered in the hall took it upon themselves to name their
new town marshal to fill the vacancy voluntarily made by Rufe Biggs.
Someone picked up the fallen badge and handed it to their new law
enforcement officer.

Jim Torrance’s hands just naturally slid down to the guns at his hips.

“I’m naming myself two deputies right now,” he said. “Later maybe I’m
going to ask two-three more to kick in with me--that is, if it comes to
a clean-up. You, Sam Pepper; you, Bill Yarbo. You’re both sworn in to
lend a hand. Pop out and get me an ax and a crowbar.”

Only a block from the hall was the Sundown jail. Torrance knew that
Biggs had the key, hence the ax and crowbar.

He got the battered door off its hinges and stood it against the side
of the squat, square building.

“You come out, you fellows in there,” he called. And out came three
untidy men, one swaggering, two cowering, all scared. For they didn’t
like this sort of an exit, and they didn’t like the tone of the voice
commanding them--and the grim-faced crowd that had followed Torrance
looked as much like a lynching party as anything else.

“We’re not going to need a jail in Sundown any more, boys,” said the
new marshal of Sundown. “If you’re the right kind of men, you don’t
have to go into jail. If you’re not the kind that Sundown hankers
for--well, that’s going to be your hard luck. Now you three--and I
don’t know a damn thing about you--just get the hell out of here as
fast as you can, and keep on going. You don’t have to come back unless
you think it’s healthy here. Just spread the news as you go. That’s
all, boys. Good luck.”

The suddenly released three vanished in the dark.

Somebody laughed.

A cheer went up.

Jim Torrance hitched up his guns, rolled a cigarette, pushed his hat
pretty far back--and strolled over to the Stag Horn saloon.

CHAPTER XVIII

Jim Torrance didn’t stop in the barroom downstairs; he looked in at the
door, saw that Murdo wasn’t there, and went on upstairs. On his way he
was thinking: “I came to Sundown for two reasons--to get to ranching
again and to find Steve Bordereau. I hardly know what my ranch looks
like; I’ve scarcely more than clapped my eyes on Bordereau, though
we’ve tried to shoot it out twice.”

He entered the main gambling room on the second story and went up to
the bar. The place was pretty well filled; men were drinking and games
were going full blast. But again he failed to see Clark Murdo.

His thumbs were hooked into his belt as he leaned against the bar. He
was about to call for a drink when he saw Florinda. She was across the
room, standing stock still and looking at him, her eyes enormous, her
face pale, her lips vivid red, her jewels flaming. She made a queer
little gesture, her beringed hands going up to her bosom. But it was
not that that called him; it was the look in her eyes. He went across
the room to a small table and sat down. Instantly she hurried to him;
she gave him a smile which was all too patently made for the occasion,
for he saw that she looked frightened.

“Sit down, Señorita?” he invited. “We might have something to drink.”

“_Gracias, Señor!_ Oh, yes, I will be glad.”

She sat down; a bottle and glasses were brought them; Torrance sat idly
twisting his glass between hard brown fingers while she looked deep
into his eyes in a queer, troubling sort of way.

“You have come back, Jim Torrance?” Only she called him “Jeem” and
put so many r’s into his name, Torrance, that it sounded like water
rippling over smooth stones. “I have heard so many things, such wild
tales about you! You were hurt, no?”

He shrugged. “Nothing to matter.” And then he asked abruptly: “Did you
want to see me? You’ve got something to tell me?”

She snatched up her glass and drank thirstily. She said, as though he
had accused her of something and she were defending herself, “Me, with
something to tell you?” Then she laughed at that. “What could I have to
tell you, Señor Jeem?”

“I imagine there are a good many things you get to hear about here that
I wouldn’t mind knowing,” he said bluntly. And then he asked: “Where’s
Murdo? I don’t see him here anywhere tonight.”

“He has not come yet. Maybe he won’t come tonight.”

“Once you said you were a friend of mine.”

“I am!” Dramatically she pressed both hands to her breast. “With all my
heart, Señor Jeem!”

“You are a friend of Murdo’s, too?”

Those lusciously full red lips of hers hardened and thinned.

“Clark Murdo to me is the same as Steve Bordereau. They are the two
men I hate!”

“Why?”

“There are ten million reasons. Do not ask me, Señor; to talk about it
would make me want to stick a knife in them.”

“The two are good friends, Murdo and Bordereau? They’re on the level
with each other?”

She laughed in his face, and her laugh was a sneer.

“Are you a great big fool, then? Do you think either one of two men
like those could be square with any other man? They are two cheats,
always cheating each other.”

“I thought so,” said Jim Torrance.

“Murdo hates you,” she said, and, whispering, her whisper was almost
a hiss, “for what you did when you brought the dead man here from the
graveyard, and maybe for other things. I do not know, but he hates you.
And he is the kind of man, like Steve Bordereau, who would come up
behind you and kill.”

He nodded. “I generally keep my back to the wall,” he said.

She gave him an elaborate Southern shrug. About to rise and go, for it
was seldom that she tarried long at any one table, a moment she held
poised, uncertain, undecided. Then she said with a quick, savage flash
of her deep black eyes:

“Yes! Maybe I will have something to tell you! _Vamos a ver!_ Oh, but
we are going to see!” She rose then, yet finished her thought: “Men are
such fools! They think when they go in a room and shut a door, no one
can listen!”

“Florinda! Tell me this. Has Bordereau been here lately to see Murdo?”

But she didn’t stop to answer. He watched her go, an enigma now as
ever; he saw her stop hoveringly like a butterfly at another table
where three men were.

He saw that Charlie, the bartender with the bull neck, was watching
him. He was conscious too that two other men--men he didn’t know, yet
whose faces he had seen here before, Bordereau’s men or Clark Murdo’s
without a doubt--were watching him even more narrowly than the man
behind the bar. Presently one of them got up and went out, passing
around the end of the bar and through the door which Torrance knew led
into the hallway that gave upon the private rooms.

“Gone looking for Murdo,” thought Torrance.

After that he didn’t lose sight of the door, but nevertheless out of
the corner of his eye he saw the several men who came into the room
together, having just come up the stairs from the street. They were
Hasbrook and Kibbee and Evans, leading the way, with Curly Redmond,
Dick Pardee, Dave Drennen, Bill Yarbo and Sam Pepper. Their eyes sought
and found him; when he gave no sign of having seen them, they proceeded
to ignore him after his own fashion. Hasbrook, Kibbee and Evans went
straight to the faro layout and into action, three old stagers who,
when they made their bets, bet ’em high. The others, with the exception
of Sam Pepper, stepped over to a long table where dice were tumbling
and rolling, while, as for Sam, he just hovered. He was so tensely
alert, trying to take in everything, that his eyes looked to be on
fire and his ears seemed actually to quiver like a nervous horse’s.

Then the narrow door opened and Clark Murdo entered. He stopped and ran
his eyes swiftly over the room. Jim Torrance pushed his chair back and
stood up, and Murdo’s eyes hardened to a meeting with his. Torrance
went across the room to him.

“Murdo,” he said crisply, “I want a talk with you.”

“Yes? Well, I’ll listen if you make it snappy,” said Murdo. “What’s on
your mind?”

“Two-three things. First, maybe you’ve heard that Rufe Biggs has
decided to quit being town marshal?”

Murdo stepped back through the still open door.

“Come into a room where we’ll be alone,” he said.

Torrance followed him, not saying anything. They went into one of the
small poker rooms. Murdo flung open the door and said, “Come in.”

“After you,” said Torrance, very polite.

Murdo shrugged and went in first. Torrance, following him, saw that the
room was already occupied by two men; one was the fellow who without
doubt had just come to warn Murdo of Torrance’s presence in the main
gambling room, and who looked like a cross between a seedy fox and a
gaunt bulldog, and the other was that gangling, ferret-eyed man so
nearly always at Murdo’s beck and call whom Torrance remembered having
encountered at least twice already. Their eyes were like snakes’
eyes, just that cold and void of expression--snakes’ eyes or bright
hard-polished shoe buttons.

“Sure, let’s talk!” said Murdo, and, having spoken, his jaws suddenly
clamped hard, his lips squeezed together in a bloodless line of hate
and menace; his mouth was then like a frog’s mouth.

Torrance shut the door; there was a key in the lock and he turned it
and drew it out and dropped it into his pocket.

“We won’t want to be disturbed,” he said, and took a single sidewise
step which put him snugly in a corner, his back to the wall. His two
thumbs had again hooked themselves into his belt.

The three pairs of eyes bent so steadily and balefully upon him
flickered then. It had been in Murdo’s mind to lock the door, but
Torrance had been too quick for him; somehow the thing upset him.

“Well, what’s it all about?” he demanded. “Put a name to it.”

“Rufe Biggs has quit, like I told you. I think he was wise at that,
don’t you, Murdo?”

“Biggs is a yellow dog,” said Murdo. “It makes no difference to me what
he does.”

“He told you who the new town marshal is?”

“You won’t last long at it, Torrance. You can take that from me.”

“No, I won’t last long. That’s the way I want it.”

“What the hell? Are you driving at anything or ain’t you?”

“Me, I’m a rancher, not a nursemaid for a sick town. Me, I want to get
my job done and go back to my stock. That’s why I won’t last long here
as marshal.”

Murdo laughed at him, but it wasn’t much of a laugh. Torrance went on
quietly:

“You, Murdo, are not to last here even as long as I am. One way or
another you are getting out of here now, tonight. One way or another
you’re going fast and far. And you’re not to come back.”

Murdo, his mind made up, was temporizing, waiting for a break, and
Jim Torrance was no such fool as not to know it. Murdo, affecting a
sneering sort of manner, said:

“So I’m to just roll my bundle and vamoose, am I? Just let the shop
here run itself--”

“That needn’t worry you. It’s not your joint anyhow; it’s Steve
Bordereau’s, and Bordereau’s on the run, maybe already streaking for
the border, wanted for robbery and murder. You don’t think he’d be fool
enough to ever come back here for an accounting, do you?”

He saw that, while Murdo was watching him like a hawk, Murdo’s two
killers now had their eyes bent on their boss, watching for a sign.

“So I’m invited just to step along and let the place run itself?” said
Murdo. “Maybe you’re thinking of taking it over yourself?”

“The girl out there, Florinda, can run it. Between her and Charlie,
your barkeep, they’ll do well enough.”

Murdo strove for a sort of bantering, good-natured laugh--and Jim
Torrance, knowing full well that there was no laughter in the man’s
heart, grew a notch more tense and alert than before.

“Stop your bluffing, Torrance,” said Murdo, trying to be genial. “Come
on out and I’ll stand you a drink. Why, man alive--”

Somehow Murdo had given the signal, and Jim Torrance knew it, though
he didn’t quite know how. At the same split second Murdo and his two
gunmen went for their guns.

* * * * *

Into the gambling room the noise of a sudden crash of gunfire burst
like rolling thunder through the comparative silence. The first men to
run out of the room and into the hallway were Dick Pardee and Curly
Redmond; close behind them, a sturdy and compact mass of determined
men, came Evans and Hasbrook and Doc Kibbee, with Dave Drennen and Sam
Pepper and Lying Bill Yarbo crowding one another for elbow room, each
striving to get a leap in advance of the others. They came to the door
of the poker room and found it locked; they yelled their demands for
ingress and hurled their weights on the door. Before they could batter
it down, they heard a key shoot the bolt back, the door was opened and
they looked into the small room through a blue haze of powder smoke.

Clark Murdo leaned back, white-faced, against a wall, his left hand
clutching his right shoulder; his gun lay on the floor at his feet. One
of his men, the gangling youngster with the furtive eyes and rabbit
teeth, crouched down, his gun arm broken, blood dripping from his
finger tips. The other of the Murdo men lay on his side, doubled up in
agony.

It was therefore Jim Torrance who had opened the door. There was not a
scratch on him. Already he had slid his guns back into their holsters.
He was finishing the cigarette he had been smoking.

“Boys,” he said as they came in, “can you scare me up a wagon and a
man to drive it? I want these gents hauled out of town. They’re not
supposed to come back any more. Cart ’em out to the graveyard and
dump ’em there. If they’re alive in the morning, they can move on; if
they’re dead by then, we’ll dig ’em under.”

“I’m damned!” said old Doc Kibbee. “All three of ’em had their guns in
their hands--and not a one of ’em fired a shot! Is this man Torrance
fast? Or is he just chain lightning?”

After that for a time Sundown called its new marshal Lightning. But
that was too direct and obvious, and also they grew to like him, and
so after a while Marshal Jim Torrance of Sundown was familiarly and
affectionately known as Slow Jim.

CHAPTER XIX

And days passed, as days have a way of doing. That fine old trio from
Canyon City, Evans and Hasbrook and Kibbee, had returned home well
content after seeing the sign nailed to the tree in front of the Stag
Horn. It was painted in big black letters on a pine board; you could
read it across the street:

NOTICE

1. Steve Bordereau is on the run, wanted for murder and robbery.

2. Clark Murdo has been kicked out of town.

3. Men like them are invited to clear out of Sundown.

4. The jail door is busted. So no arrests will be made.

The town marshal was no longer in town. He went back straightway to his
new ranch; he hired a couple of extra men and was busy from daylight to
dark making improvements, building for the future, digging in for the
winter. He said:

“I like this country. I’ve moved around enough. I’m here as long as I
live.”

He looked over the old Harper ranch, one panhandle end of which cut in
between his own place and the King Cannon spread, and found it utterly
to his liking, with its rolling hills, its valley land and meadows, its
water in plenty supplied by Sundown Creek weaving a glinting, laughing
way across it. He opened negotiations with the absent owner, now
enjoying the sunset of his life under a shade tree down in Yuma. And at
times Jim Torrance, riding over these half-wild, half-tamed acres, met
a slim, sweet, eager girl also riding, and they rode together through
sunlight and shadow of days which were crisp and clean with October
merging into November, and which were days never to be forgotten,
subtly touched with green magic.

The Sam Peppers had returned home. Bill Yarbo had gone back to his own
ragged mountain ranch. At the King Cannon ranch Sally Dawn, with an
Indian woman as housekeeper and chaperon, had launched herself upon a
brave campaign of starting life over. She knew that the chances were
all against her; she dreaded the day when the old home would be hers
no longer, gone, through the trickery of Steve Bordereau, into his
hands or those of some consignee of his--anyhow, irretrievably gone
from hers. Still, since she loved the place so and was so young and
vital, there were times when her hopes were as strong and gay as a
flock of bluebirds. Because of their insistence, she kept on a purely
theoretical pay roll Curly Redmond and Dick Pardee and Dave Drennen.
They, like Jim Torrance and his men, were rebuilding.

Days shortened; flurries of rain came and were blown away, leaving the
freshly washed sky a wonderful blue; storms gathered and rumbled over
the mountains and painted the heights a dazzling white which was to
last until May, a good five or six months or longer; then the storm
clouds went where all things go, and there were again still, chill,
gloriously bright days, and nights that were velvet-black but sprinkled
with frosty brilliants.

The Stag Horn still ran full blast. A young man, bloodless looking
and thin and with the stamp of towns on him, came in one day and took
the place over. He had bought it, lock, stock and barrel, from Steve
Bordereau. Jim Torrance, news of this brought him by that carrier
pigeon of a gossip, Sam Pepper, rode into Sundown and in his official
capacity of town marshal had a heart-to-heart talk with Art Pilgrim,
the new owner.

“Where’d you see Bordereau?” asked Torrance.

Art Pilgrim’s slim white hands went up to his hollow chest, his thumbs
into the armholes of his flowered vest.

“Didn’t ever see him, Mr. Town Marshal,” he said.

“How come?” asked Torrance.

“Any business of yours?”

“Yes. You’re a new man here; if you’re on the up-and-up, you’ll last.
If you’re a Bordereau kind of man, and if you’re kicking in with him,
you won’t last.”

“I don’t know Bordereau. I never saw him. I don’t know anything about
him except that he owned this place and made it pay big money. He knew
about me the same way; I had my own saloon at Alamagordo. I had a
chance to sell and sold. My business with Bordereau was done through a
lawyer over there. That’s all I know.”

“Fair enough,” said Torrance, and got up to go. Over his shoulder he
said: “If you’ve got a good strong safe here, you better keep your
money in it. And you better go dig a hole somewhere and stick the safe
in it and cover it over.”

“Now, what’s that mean?”

“So long,” said Torrance.

Sam Pepper, living so near Torrance, was in and out at all hours, his
ear to the ground, his nose twitching to any breeze that might bear
even a hint of something. A queer sort of friendship sprang up between
the two; and a friendship also between Torrance and Lying Bill Yarbo
who, like Sam, dropped in frequently. The three were sitting on Jim’s
porch one evening, sampling fresh cider out of a jug that had been sent
over that day from the King Cannon apple orchard, when Sam blurted out:

“Looky here, Jim! You keep hanging on to the idea that we ain’t seen
the last of Steve Bordereau. What in tarnation makes you so sure?”

Torrance said promptly, “Bordereau is a gambler first, last and all the
time, isn’t he?”

“Sure. He’s a lot of other things, killer and highwayman and all round
crook, but the bottom of everything with him is that he’s a gambler.
But what about it?”

“A gambler always loses,” said Torrance. “Ever notice?”

Both Sam and Bill thought that over in a silence broken only by
gurglings now and then from the jug. They had known many a gambler in
their time, and had known many a big-time gambler to get into big money.

“A gambler always loses,” said Torrance. “I’ve noticed. I’ve never
known one of the breed yet to have enough money left to bury him when
he died. It’s like this with Steve Bordereau. He’s made himself a bit
of a stake, and when a gambler makes a stake, right away he’s got to
double it; he can’t quit any more than a booze hound can stop lapping
up his booze. He’s got Sally Dawn’s gold; he’s got what he made from
his stick-ups at the Yellow Pine, the Mountain City and the Rocky.
On top of that he got something out of Canyon City--but he’s not
forgetting that that night I had fifty thousand dollars tied to my
saddle strings, and it was his money--and he lost it. Think he’s going
to let that go? Having played in luck all this time, as he’s got to
figure it, think he’s going to quit? Give a man like that a winning
streak at poker or faro or at the wheel, is he going to stop? The
answer is, Hell no!”

“What about Murdo?” demanded Sam.

“That, I don’t know. I wanted him to get out of here alive, and he did.
I hoped he’d know where to find Bordereau and would kick in with him.
I hoped that they’d feel like maybe I owed ’em something, and that
they’d drop in some time to collect. And, talking about gambling, I’ll
bet either one of you two gents, or both of you, a forty dollar Stetson
against a bottle of beer that inside of ten days or two weeks we have
’em, or anyhow Bordereau, with us. Maybe tonight or tomorrow night or
the next.”

“Got a notion where he’s holing up, I suppose?” said Sam.

“No. Might be anywhere. Could be up in the hills yet; there’s not too
much snow. Could be within half a dozen miles of Sundown all the time;
could be a day’s ride away. Not any further than that, Sambo.”

“And you figure him to come down looking for you?” Sam sat back tighter
against the wall, and stared off in all directions into the gathering
dark and began rubbing his hands together as though to get them warm;
well, the evenings did grow cold now.

“That’s the way I figure it,” said Torrance.

“How many men you suppose he’s got with him by now, Jim?” asked Bill
Yarbo.

“Sam can tell you, Bill.”

“Me?” exclaimed Sam.

Torrance’s face looked stern in the flare of the match he lifted to
his cigarette, yet there was a humorous quirk coming and going at the
corner of his mouth.

“Sure,” he said. “You told me only a couple of days ago.”

“Me?” said Sam again. “You’re crazy, Jim.”

“You were saying how Sundown had been losing part of its population the
last few weeks. You mentioned the names of several men who used to hang
around the Stag Horn and who’ve gone on somewhere else lately--and you
said ‘Good riddance, anyhow,’ seeing the sort they were!”

“Why, shoot me down!” gasped Sam. “I never thought of that! You mean
all them boys has kicked in with Steve? Why, say! If you’re right he
must have eight or ten or a dozen boys with him altogether.”

Torrance stood up to go inside. “Getting cold out here,” he said.

“But listen!” said Sam. “If Steve Bordereau’s got all those hell
twisters with him-- Say, it’s quite a crowd! And what would he want so
many for?”

“Maybe he’s figuring on a good sized job of work,” said Torrance.
“Maybe he’s figuring on making his last play up here, then riding
hell-for-leather somewhere else. Anyhow there’s not a bank inside a
hundred miles that I haven’t sent word to that they better sleep with
one eye open; and whenever the stage carries a fat money box they’re
carrying two extra guards inside.”

Bill Yarbo said ponderously, “If you’re halfway right in your guess
work, Jim, here’s this to chaw on: Steve can still dodge around in the
mountains, what with the way the weather’s been, where a man’s as hard
to find as a flea on a long-haired pup. But come one good storm that
might blow along any day now, and he’d get himself plugged up where it
would take some getting out. What I mean is, if he’s set, like you say
you think he is, for another play, he’ll be making it right soon. It’ll
be right soon or not any this year, Jim.”

“Right soon, Bill,” said Jim.

* * * * *

A new trail, weaving among the little hills, threading through the
pines, came into being across the panhandle of the Harper place and
connected Jim Torrance’s ranch with Sally Dawn’s. Tonight, since it was
early when first Sam and then Bill rode away, Torrance rode that trail.
He said to himself: “That was mighty good cider. I’ll just ride by and
say thanks.”

But, about midway between his place and Sally Dawn’s, where the winding
trail went over a gentle knoll among both pines and big oaks, he saw
another rider coming to meet him. Wondering who it might be, he eased
himself sideways in the saddle, his right hand on the cantle close to
his hip. He was getting so he watched shadows of late; he had a feeling
in his bones it might pay him to do so.

It was Sally Dawn, riding alone.

“Right here,” said Torrance where they met on the top of the knoll,
“I’m going to build me my house--my real home. Think you’d like it?”

“This spot was made for a home,” said Sally Dawn. “It’s been waiting
for it thousands and thousands of years. Poor little lonely hilltop!”

“I can pump water up out of the creek,” said Torrance. “I can pipe it
here easy as downing a mug of cider. That was the best cider ever,
Sally Dawn.”

“Funny we met here; I was sort of restless tonight. Know what I was
going to do? You’ve never asked me to call on you, but I was doing it
anyhow.”

“That’s great. Come ahead.”

“Well--no. As long as I’ve had my visit with you, as long as you’ve
made your duty call--I love to ride at night.”

“I was coming over to thank you for the cider.-- Ever see a nice deep
pool, all shady in summertime, on top of a hill like this?”

“They don’t grow that way, do they?”

“Big enough and deep enough for a swim. And ducks always waddling into
it or out of it--”

“I know. White ducks with nice curly tails. And yellow bills and
feet--they keep them so nice and clean, don’t they?”

“Look here,” said Torrance, “I don’t like your riding off alone like
this after dark.”

“Mercy!” cried Sally Dawn. “Sounds like you’d lock me up in a dark
closet and make me go to bed without any supper if I didn’t mind you!”

“It’s Steve Bordereau,” said Torrance in dead earnest. “He hasn’t
finished down here. He’s got the toughest crowd with him that you
could think of. They’re headed this way before long, and I know it. I
wouldn’t want you running into them.”

It was too dark for them to see each other’s faces at all clearly, to
capture any play of expression, but he did see the liquid flash of her
eyes in the starlight as she turned slightly and lifted them to his.

“I don’t believe it,” she said presently. “He has gone for good. You
have just thought about him so much and for so many years--”

“No. It isn’t that. He is coming back. I don’t know that he will come
near you; but I don’t want to think of your running into that crowd
alone. Not at night, off in the woods like this. Remember what you did
to him once. Think he’s the sort to forget?”

They rode for an hour, well up to the benchland of the Harper place,
and they stopped many times and looked off across the wide acreage, and
he sketched for her his budding plans against the time when this was
all his, when his ranch and hers had a common boundary line.

... And somehow, though nothing quite direct was said about it, both
thought:

“Maybe someday the fence along that line will come down.”

* * * * *

By this time Jim Torrance had his bunk house fixed up so that his men,
three of them now, ate and slept there. He himself, though no one knew,
slept in the barn. He’d go to his house first, then after a while put
out his light, lock up and betake himself to a loft over the stalls
where his favorite horses were kept at night. It was his thought that
Steve Bordereau, did his path ever lead him anywhere near the ranch in
passing, might take off time to shoot a few finely bred horses, if he
didn’t find it handy to drive them off.

Lights in the bunk house were out by nine or ten o’clock. Torrance had
got into the habit of taking a nap in his own house; about two or three
in the morning he saddled and went for a ride; when he got back he went
to the barn for any more sleep he might have coming.

There were nights when a couple of hours of sleep were all that he
got, all that he wanted. With every passing hour he felt surer and
surer that not much longer did he have to wait; he thought the thing
over from every possible angle, dead set against letting himself
trick himself into the old pit of simply believing what he wanted to
believe; he thought of all that he knew of Steve Bordereau, one way and
another, and could see only the one logical conclusion--Bordereau was
coming back, and soon.

If Bordereau struck Sundown, thought Torrance, he’d strike where most
loot was to be had, and that was the Stag Horn where games ran high and
where the house made money hand over fist. Wouldn’t Bordereau know all
about that? And just where the money would be kept? And at just what
hour to strike?

One day Sam Pepper came nosing in, and had hardly had a drink--Sam
always favored a free drink--when he gave speech with the newest of
Sundown news.

“I just seen a feller,” said Sam, “that I ain’t clapped my peepers on
since Steve Bordereau played dead and buried pore old Doc Taylor. A
feller named LeSarge, Jake LeSarge.”

“Jake LeSarge? Who’s he? Tell me about him.”

“I can tell you plenty!” said Sam, and did.

LeSarge, if you’d take his word for it, was tougher than the plank
steaks they sold over to Joe’s Lunch Counter. Still a young feller,
maybe twenty-three-four, he had hung around Sundown off and on for ten
years. Always in trouble, always hell-raising. Quarrelsome. A cheap
skate, a tin-horn, as crooked as a dog’s hind leg--and a sort of pet of
Steve Bordereau’s. Two years ago he killed Larry McKibben, and Larry
was an up-and-up boy, well liked. LeSarge had skipped out, stayed away
six months or so, and had crept back under Bordereau’s wing. And a good
many things were said of him that nobody could prove--not nice things.

“And he’s back,” said Sam. “Me, I was wondering, if Steve has a gang
like you say, why Jake LeSarge ain’t one of ’em.”

Jim Torrance was more interested than Sam had hoped to find him.

“What’s this LeSarge doing in town now?” he asked. “Where’s he hanging
out?”

“He’s hanging around the Stag Horn. He’s buying drinks, free with
his money, which he ain’t always. I seen him making a play at the
Señorita--Florinda, you know. Looked like he was stuck on her, trying
to corner her, like maybe he’d like to go out and buy a dog collar that
would fit that white neck of hers. Outside all that, he wasn’t doing
much of anything I could see.”

Torrance tilted his chair back, his lean brown hands behind his head,
his eyes, with a sort of vacant look in them, going up to the cross
beams and smoky rafters above.

It was so long before he moved or spoke that Sam began to fidget. At
last, however, he kicked his chair back and stood up.

“All right, Sam,” he said. “Thanks for the tip-off. And now-- Well,
good night.”

“Hey!” cried Sam Pepper. But Jim Torrance was gone, off to the barn to
saddle and ride. And Sam Pepper couldn’t even be sure what direction
his ride was taking him, since Torrance cut straight across the road
into the pines and might have gone anywhere.

So he had to yell after the departing figure: “Hey, Jim! Where are you
going?”

And it just happened that this time Torrance answered him.

“Over to the King Cannon Ranch,” he said.

Only half a dozen words, not an outstanding word among them, but as
things were to happen those six words were fateful.

CHAPTER XX

Torrance hit the high spots streaking over to the King Cannon Ranch.
But he got only about half way, to the top of that pine-and-oak studded
knoll where some day the home was to be, when he rode into a sudden,
unpresaged rain. It was a rain of bullets, and the streaks of light
were orange-red flames from a rifle, and, like a man shot through the
head, he spilled out of the saddle. As he went down, untouched by any
of those flying leaden pellets, he snatched out a gun with one hand
while with the other he gave his horse a resounding slap to send the
animal racing straight on. And Torrance, striking earth and rolling
adroitly, brought up standing behind a thick-boled oak.

He had hardly come up erect on his toes when he glimpsed the man
shooting at him. His assailant was scarcely twenty steps away, sitting
a black horse in the shadows and all but invisible, and yet the wonder
remained that Torrance wasn’t killed and that he didn’t shoot the man
dead at the first shot. It was just one of those odd happenings which
so thickly besprinkle life wherever life is running strong and swift.

The heavy slug from Torrance’s forty-four, winged on its way by the
several chances of haste, uncertain light and moving figures, slammed
into the narrow margin of the other man’s rifle barrel, striking it so
near the trigger guard that the flying wrath of the bullet came next
door to raising a blister on the hardened trigger finger. It was like
slugging the gun with a sledge hammer; anyhow the rifle flew out of the
would-be killer’s hands and the man who thus relinquished his gun gave
voice to an involuntary howl of rage, pain and fright commingled. For
the fragment of a second he thought he had been shot--he didn’t quite
know where.

And he wasn’t granted much time to think about things. Torrance saw,
because of the star glint on steel, the flash of the weapon flying out
of his attacker’s hands, and then asked no better than to get the man
in his two hands. He had fired the one shot only; he had his gun up
for the second; he was nicely balanced on his toes. Obeying impulse, a
thing he did far more often than most men realized, he hurled himself
forward across the few steps intervening between himself and the man
who had just tried to kill him. And in some few seconds the two were
gripped together like two wildcats.

There in the dark, shot through with starlight, with their horses
snorting and stamping and watching and wanting to run away, yet not
moving out of their tracks, the two men fought as two men will when
there is only one thought in mind and heart and sinew, to win anyhow.
To win with a blow of a clubbed fist, with a strangle grip, with a
sudden knee or a brutal boot--to save your own life by beating the
other fellow into insensibility or by the directer method of killing
him. Yet, like a small bell beating in his brain, there was in Jim
Torrance the urge: “Get him, but get him alive so he can talk!”

It was Jake LeSarge whom Jim Torrance jerked down off his horse, though
at the time Torrance had not the least inkling of the man’s identity;
and Jake LeSarge, half Cherokee and sinewy and slippery, was as hard
to deal with as a young panther. He was like a snake for quick-darting
elusiveness, like a driving rod on the new western locomotives for the
blows he struck. Jim Torrance came to know all this within some ten
seconds, during which the two gave and took some measure of each other.

It just happened that Jim Torrance had what no other man that Sundown
ever knew had in the superlative degree, the something which made him
what he was, the one Town Marshal of Sundown whose memory will linger
a long, long time after so many other things mundane are forgotten. He
had the indestructible spirit. He took a smashing blow in the jaw and
reeled backward and tottered on his heels and took another blow under
his heart and felt the living breath jolted out of him, and all he did
was set his teeth and bore back into the tornado that had struck him.
Head down, chin protected, arms flailing and driving hard fists like
knobby clubs, he paid back in full for all he got.

He landed by chance, or luck, on LeSarge’s Adam’s apple, corded and
tight and hard, and the blow was like that of a sledge beating on an
anvil. Almost it broke young Jake LeSarge’s neck. It did knock him flat
at the same time that it choked him up so that he thought he was dying
for lack of breath. Before he could master his muscles and command
them to jerk his lean, battling body upright, Jim Torrance was on top
of him, battering him with merciless fists. Then Torrance’s hands,
the fingers like steel hooks, shut down on his throat until LeSarge’s
tongue lolled like a thirsty dog’s, and his eyes bulged. A tremor,
which the other man could feel, ran through his body from head to foot.

“Got you, damn you!” panted Jim Torrance.

Then his own head cleared. He kept a strangle-hold on the other man’s
throat, yet he no longer squeezed so hard; he remembered that he did
not want to kill but to ask his questions and get them answered.

“Who the hell are you?” he demanded. “Quick, or I’ll put a bullet
square between your eyes!”

The other man, in sudden fear of death, answered:

“Me, I’m LeSarge, Jake LeSarge. I made a mistake--got the wrong man--”

“Sure!” said Torrance. “Sure! Now, where’ve you been? Down at the King
Cannon ranch, huh? Lie to me, and I’ll know it! I’ll batter your brains
out!”

“Yes,” said LeSarge. “Yes. At the Cannon ranch. I just come from there!”

“Bordereau sent you?”

“No! I swear--”

“I tell you I’ll batter your brains out!”

“Leave up on my throat, will you? Yes, then. Bordereau sent me. He told
me--”

He stopped there. Torrance eased up on him a bit, came into a
squatting position over his captive and said:

“He sent you to get me, didn’t he? He told you to snoop around the King
Cannon place, to ride over and meet up with me, or to get me over at my
place or wherever you could find me. Am I right?”

“I don’t even know who you are! I tell you I made a mistake; I was
looking for another man. Can’t you understand, pardner? I don’t even
know who the hell you are right now!”

“That’s funny,” said Torrance. He withdrew his hands then entirely from
the other man; balanced on his heels he was grinning the way a wolf
grins at the kill. He said, “It’s mighty funny.” He had jammed his
gun back into its leather; now he jerked it out and set its cylinder
spinning with its small-voiced metallic clicks. He said, “Tell me what
my name is and tell it fast, or so help me I’m going to kill you!”

Then, in all haste LeSarge, knowing the voice of fate when he heard it
beating on his ear drums, gasped out:

“You--you’re Torrance, Jim Torrance!”

“Sure.” Torrance shoved his gun back into its holster. He stood up.

“You’re coming along with me, LeSarge,” he said. “_Sabe?_ You’re coming
sweet and soft and willing, wherever I say. _Sabe?_”

“Yes,” said LeSarge. “Yes. I’ll come. You got me, Torrance.”

“You’re damn well right, I got you,” said Torrance. “Now watch your
step.”

“All right,” said Jake LeSarge. “All right. I know when I’m licked. I’m
playing good dog. Where do we go?”

“I don’t know!” said Torrance. “I don’t know. You see, I do know who
you are now; I know you for a crook and a yellow dog. But I don’t know
about you and Steve Bordereau. I don’t know how much he is paying you.
I don’t know how easy it would be to buy you, to get you to double
cross him. You ought to be cheap. Let me get you somewhere in the light
where I can look at you.”

“I’m on the square, Torrance. I’ve always been on the level--”

“Shut your trap, you dirty liar! Climb on your horse. Let’s ride. Never
mind about your rifle; I’ll take it for you.”

“Where’re we going?”

“It isn’t far to the King Cannon ranch house. We might as well look in
there.”

There was a light in the bunk house and as they rode nearer the hushed
and sentimental strains of a guitar floated out to them. Then a voice
was raised in song, a doleful rendition, and thereafter something was
thrown, no doubt at the musician; it sounded like a heavy piece of
crockery crashing against the wall.

“Dry up, can’t you?” said the voice of the man who had been goaded into
throwing things. “I’ve stood all I can.”

Torrance and his captive dismounted and went to the door.

“Here’s company, boys,” said Torrance.

Curly and Drennen and young Pardee--it had been Pardee strumming and
vocalizing--looked at them curiously.

“Hello,” said Drennen. “This is LeSarge you’ve got with you, Torrance.
What do you want him for?”

“I’m not sure. Is he any good for anything?”

“Absolutely not. Unless maybe we could chop him up and use him to
poison coyotes with.”

LeSarge, sullen and vicious looking, strove also to look bold and
defiant but remained furtive and couldn’t keep the apprehension out of
his restless eyes.

“I wanted a look at him by lamp light,” said Torrance. “So I’d be sure
and know him if I ever saw him again. Just now he tried to shoot me.
He’s been snooping around the ranch here tonight, I don’t know what
for. You boys wouldn’t know?”

No, they couldn’t figure it out. And they agreed there was no use
asking him; he couldn’t tell the truth even if he tried, even if you
played Indian with him and cut his hide into strips.

“What are you going to do with him?” asked Curly.

“I ought to have shot him while I had the chance,” said Torrance, and
sounded regretful. “At the time, though, I was sort of curious and--
Oh, we’ll let him go. You can go now, LeSarge. And you’re to keep on
going, _sabe_? And you’re never to come back this way. We’re asking
men like you to keep out of Sundown for good. I’m town marshal now; it
would be just a matter of duty to kill you on sight. Now, scat!”

LeSarge ducked out through the door, got onto his horse and was off
like a streak. From some little distance he screamed something back,
his voice high and breaking with rage.

“I don’t like his poking around here,” said Torrance. “He’s one of
Bordereau’s men.” He looked at Curly and Drennen and Pardee. “Sally
Dawn oughtn’t to be out after dark,” he said. “And whenever she is,
can’t one of you boys always be on hand?”

The three young fellows glanced at one another and seemed anxious.

“She’s already gone somewhere tonight,” said Dick Pardee. But none of
them knew where. “About half an hour ago.” They were of the opinion
that she had ridden into Sundown for something.

“I’m going into Sundown now,” said Torrance. He set down LeSarge’s
rifle and went to the door. “I’ll look for her. And it’s just as well
to follow LeSarge a ways; he’s headed back toward town.”

“It might be an idea if we rode along?” suggested Dave Drennen.

“It might. I won’t wait, though, for you boys to saddle. You’ll most
likely meet up with me.”

CHAPTER XXI

Florinda, though as nervous as a cat and all hot impatience, awaited
her chance to slip out of the Stag Horn gambling room without drawing
any curious attention to herself. She found the hallway empty and
darted across it like a vivid flash; she caught up her skirts and ran
down the back stairs.

At the rear of the Stag Horn was a long low shed where riders left
their horses; between the shed and the main building was a dark, narrow
alley. She sped along this, turned the corner of the house and came
around to the front of the saloon where the continuation of the alley,
making a right angle, gave upon Sundown’s main street. There, lurking
in the shadows, glancing eagerly up and down, she forced herself to
wait another impatient moment.

She was looking for someone, anyone whom she knew well and could depend
on, someone to carry a message in all haste. She saw a man coming along
the plank sidewalk, a young fellow on high heels with their spurs still
on them and jangling like small iron bells at every stride. She started
to speak to him; she hesitated, frowning; she even put her hand out as
though to stop him and draw him into the shadows with her.

But she drew back and let him pass on without seeing her. That was
because of a sudden she had heard the measured clop of a horse’s
hoof beats and made out who, of all people, was riding this way. When
the rider was just opposite and but a few feet away, she darted out,
catching the bridle rein.

“Oh, Señorita!” she gasped. “For the love of God!”

A startled Sally Dawn stiffened in the saddle, and said coldly:

“You? What do you want with me?” She stiffened still further, saying,
“Will you please take your hand--”

“But, Señorita! Quick! I must hide, but you must talk to me for one
minute. Quick! Ride here where it is dark.”

“Are you crazy! Or do you think I am?”

“It is maybe life and death! I swear it!”

“Whose?” said a suspicious, utterly incredulous Sally Dawn. “Yours or
mine?”

“But neither! Of Señor Jim Torrance. I have to send word to him. I
can’t go because they would miss me and pretty soon they would guess
where I am. So it must be you!”

Sally Dawn was still inclined to be stand-offish and suspicious. She
didn’t like the Mexican girl; she didn’t trust her--and somehow or
other she didn’t enthuse at the thought of messages passing between her
and Jim Torrance.

But Florinda was too insistent to be altogether gainsaid.

“Quick, I tell you!” she exclaimed, and began to sound angry. “Ride
your horse here where it’s dark; let me tell you what it is all about.”

“Tell me now. Where you are!”

Then Florinda flamed out: “Don’t you care if they kill him? Don’t you
love him?”

Sally Dawn pretended to scoff with soft cool laughter at loving any
man, but suddenly shot back, “Maybe it’s you who love him!”

“I do! Yes, with all my heart. I always have since the time I saw him
first. But that is nothing; he does not love me. It is you he loves!
He loved you that first night, when he ran away with you. And now you
do not want to help him? Well then, little crazy fool, go away! I will
find some man--”

Sally Dawn at last rode into the dark mouth of the alley.

“Tell me! What is it all about?”

“It’s about Steve Bordereau. He’s in town! It’s about Clark Murdo; he’s
here, too, with Steve. They’ve got a gang with them-- Oh, I don’t know
how many men; maybe ten, maybe twenty. They’re out for trouble; then
they’re off on the run for the other side of the Mexico border. But
what Steve wants most of all, and what I guess Murdo wants just the
same, is to kill Jim Torrance.”

“But--but,” stammered Sally Dawn, beginning to believe, yet not sure,
and finding it hard to understand, “how do you know all these things?”

Florinda lifted her clenched hands above her head, her rings glowing in
what faint light there was, and shook them and came near screaming. But
she contained herself and said in a hushed voice:

“I can’t talk all night. Well, then, a man told me some of this; he is
one of Steve’s men, he is young and a little bit drunk and he loves
me and wants me to go with them, back to the border. And I have told
you all I know. And if you will ride out to Jim’s ranch--if you’ll ride
like the devil--before they finish up here and then go out to get him--”

“I’m going!” said Sally Dawn breathlessly. “And I’ll tell him you sent
me.”

She whirled her horse and raced away. And Florinda, catching up her
skirts again, ran back down the alley and to the rear of the house--and
then crept softly up the back stairs.

* * * * *

While the two girls were talking, while Sally Dawn thereafter was
racing on her errand, Jim Torrance was riding toward Sundown from the
King Cannon ranch; and some minutes before he came within sight of the
few lights of the little town, Sally Dawn had struck off into the north
road which led to his place.

He had quitted the Cannon bunk house so sharply on the heels of
LeSarge’s precipitate departure that when he came out into the county
road and rose to the crest of the first low-lying hill he not only
heard the beat of flying hoofs somewhere ahead but, a moment later,
caught a glimpse of the dark, hurrying silhouette of horse and rider.
There went LeSarge straight back toward Sundown as fast as he could
go. Torrance dipped his spurs as he shot down the hill; from the next
rise he again saw and heard the horse and rider ahead of him, hammering
straight along the road.

Torrance didn’t try to overtake the other; he merely meant to keep
him in sight for a while. LeSarge might turn to look back; not likely,
though, since he’d ridden off in such rage, in such haste and without
having any inkling that he might be followed.

Torrance saw him come to the crossroads and pass on, then swing into
the main street, clattering straight on into town. He saw him with
the dim street lights making him a more distinct figure, lights above
and below the swing doors of saloons, when at last he made a swerve.
LeSarge had come to the alley flanking the Stag Horn and had swung into
it. He had had his warning to keep away from Sundown and was ignoring
it. It might be that he had important business here tonight--

After that for a few minutes Torrance proceeded leisurely, jogging
slowly along the street, watching for some sign of Sally Dawn or of
her horse. She might have dropped in at the general store, at the post
office, at the drug store. He saw nothing of her anywhere, for the
good and sufficient reason that she was already out on the north road,
hurrying to his place.

He thought, not exactly anxious yet: “Where in thunder did she go? Just
out for a ride maybe? Maybe over to drop in on the Sam Peppers? Well,
as long as she keeps to the county road I guess she’s all right.” So he
dismounted in front of the Stag Horn, tied his horse, hitched up his
guns and stepped around the corner into the darkness of the alley which
had swallowed up Jake LeSarge.

At the rear of the building he saw that in the long shed there were
several horses, a dozen or so. They were fidgety and kept stamping
and blowing. He put his hand on three of them and discovered they were
still hot and wet. That made his brows cock up. Something like a dozen
men just arrived--and all together! And Jake LeSarge, though warned,
had come hurrying, and LeSarge was a Bordereau man--

Torrance returned to the front entrance. He went into the downstairs
bar, pausing just within the door, looking things over. The place was
quiet; there were only eight or ten men there, all peacefully minding
their business, which had to do with putting raw, red likker down where
it would do the most good--not a man in the place whom he had anything
against.

He went upstairs.

He came into the gambling room just on time.

It was a Saturday night and the place was jammed, and games were
running high even for the Stag Horn. And every man there who had been
playing or drinking stood with both arms stretched straight up in the
air. Six or eight other men, all wearing bandanas for masks over their
faces, were busy cleaning till and tables and pockets down to the last
dime.

The instant Jim Torrance came to the threshold a voice shouted, “Stick
’em up!” It was a voice Torrance didn’t recognize. But before the three
crisp words were finished, another voice boomed out, and Torrance did
know whose it was; and this voice yelled joyously, “You! Take this,
you--!”

That was Steve Bordereau. His shout and his act precipitated turmoil.
His bullet cut through Torrance’s coat. Torrance, not being sure
which of the masked men was Bordereau, yet making his guess without
worrying, had both guns in his hands and blazing before they came up
waist high. With this diversion created, men who had been taken by
surprise by the raid and who had paid to the high card in jerking their
hands up, now went for their guns, and the room was filled with the
thunder of shots and the acrid bite of powder smoke.

Then some one of the raiders yelled, “Let’s go! We’ve finished here,”
and he or someone else started shooting the lights out. There were six
coal oil lamps in the room; as fast as six bullets could go streaking
out of the barrel of a quick six gun, the six lights were out, with
glass tinkling and the smell of oil mingling with burnt powder. Then
there was a concerted rush for the rear door.

That way, Torrance knew, Bordereau and his men were departing. He
whipped about and ran back to the front stairs. He hadn’t seen Florinda
until then; even now he didn’t see her immediately, but heard her
voice. From the top of the stairs when he was half way down she was
calling him, and in her words, and most of all in the tone of her
voice, there was something that checked him almost in mid-air.

“Jim! Señor Jim! For the love of God!-- Oh, one little minute, Jim!”

“Quick! What?” he called back.

She started down the stairs; he could see her dimly because of the
light in the room below, flowing out into the lower hall. She balanced
strangely, then plunged down toward him headlong, falling like a dead
weight. She struck against him; he gathered her up in his arms, at
first impatient and angry, thinking, “The fool girl has fainted.” But
his hand, touching her breast, was wet; wet and hot with Florinda’s
blood. A convulsive shudder shook her; she tried to speak coherently
and gasped out:

“He shot me. I saw. It was Steve. I don’t care. I want to be dead. I
love you, Jim Torrance.” Only she said it all in Spanish, and it was
“Jeem,” and the “Tor-r-r-ance” still was softly running water, very
faint yet softly musical. “And, Señor Jim--”

“Listen, Florinda.” He stood there on the stairs holding her in his
arms; her own arms, with a spasmodic effort, their last, went up about
his neck. “Listen,” he told her. “You’re not going to die; you’re too
young and beautiful and gay. I’ll have a doctor--”

“I am not gay any more, Señor Jim. And in a few minutes I am not going
to be young and beautiful any longer. So now I can tell you without
shame what you know already in your heart. _Yo te amo con toda mi
corazon._-- But there are other things; they won’t matter to me, but to
you who will go on living. Steve is here to kill you. He sent some of
his men to rob the bank while he and the others robbed the place here.
Next, they were going to ride to your ranch, to kill you--”

“But I’m here, Florinda. And now I am going to carry you--”

“So I saw your Sally Dawn. And she rode to your ranch to warn you. Oh,
only a few minutes ago. And if Steve and Murdo and all the rest go
there they will find her--or meet her coming back--and Steve hates her
like he hates you. And then they are riding to Mexico.--And--Jim-- Oh,
Jim, kiss me just the one time! And hold me tight--tighter--very much
tighter, Jim--and say, ‘_Hasta la vista, Florinda mia!_’--That would be
funny, no?”

Then she tried to laugh, but when her head dropped down against his
chest he knew that Florinda was dead.

He carried her the few steps down to the room below; the best he could
do for her was to lay her slim, still body on the bar. Men, already
excited from the shots they had heard upstairs, looked at him and his
burden with bulging eyes. He spoke briefly to the bartender.

“She is dead,” he said. “Steve Bordereau shot her. Get some women to
take care of her--women who will treat her tenderly--or I’ll come back
and kill you, so help me God.”

Then he ran out of the room.

CHAPTER XXII

Jim Torrance dabbed at his eyes as he ran, and cursed under his breath
and longed with all his heart for just one thing then--to come up with
Steve Bordereau. Perhaps because his sight was at the moment blurred,
he crashed full tilt into three men advancing across the sidewalk
in front of the Stag Horn like the three Musketeers. They were Dave
Drennen, Dick Pardee and Curly Redmond, just arrived from the King
Cannon ranch.

He told them in few words, low-toned but as emphatic as the crack of a
whip, what had happened; how Bordereau and his men had got away with
their fresh loot; how Sally Dawn had ridden only a few minutes ago out
to his place; how the Bordereau crowd were on their way at last to the
border.

“They killed Florinda. She told me that they were headed out to my
place to get me. Now they know I’m in town, they may not ride that way.
But maybe their plans, already made, call for that direction. They may
run into Sally Dawn. Unless you boys, riding in just now, met them on
the county road?”

They hadn’t seen any riders, hadn’t heard anything.

“I’m on my way back to my place,” said Torrance, and went up into his
saddle.

“We’re with you,” said one of them and the three hurried to their
horses. As they did so several men came out of the Stag Horn; one of
them was Bill Yarbo. He shouted:

“What’s up, Jim? Where you headed for? After them fellers?”

“To my ranch,” Torrance called back as his horse jumped under him. “All
you boys that are not friends of Steve Bordereau come along.”

He rode first, taking chances of an ambush, into the alley and to the
shed where he had found the sweat-wet saddle horses; there was not a
horse there now, not a man. He spurred on and into the back road and
out of town to the north road, and still had no sight and caught no
sound of the raiding party. Already they must be well on their way.
And he began to feel pretty sure that they were headed back toward the
hills, toward his ranch--in the direction Sally Dawn had taken. So he
took that same road, shook out his bridle reins and touched his horse
with the spurs.

He reloaded before he was out of town; both guns were empty. How many
men had been burned down there in the gambling room before the lights
went out--and even after--he did not know. But already Bordereau knew
that he had left three of his band behind him. And that did not trouble
Steve Bordereau, so long as he sped on his way with a whole skin and
his job up here done. There’d be fewer men to pay off, more money for
him from the loot already taken and slung to his saddle strings.

Torrance had not ridden far before he heard the hammering of hoofs; at
first he thought they were ahead of him but presently realized they
were at some considerable distance behind; they told him that Curly
and Pardee and Drennen, perhaps Bill Yarbo and others were following
him; their horses’ hoofs rang out on a bit of hard road where they
swung off from the main street.

He kept storming along, anger in his heart, and sorrow, too, for he
could not forget bright Florinda dying in his arms--and fear, too, for
Sally Dawn. He would put nothing beyond Steve Bordereau tonight, and
he knew Bordereau must hate the girl if only for all the wrongs he had
done her.

Ten minutes later he again heard, faint and far, the hammering of
rushing hoofs, and this time he thought at first that he was hearing
again the men behind him, though he had thought to have outdistanced
them. But listening intently, hearing the faint flutter of sound above
the pounding of his own horse’s hoofbeats, he made out that it was
ahead of him. This time it was Bordereau and his men that he heard, and
they were speeding on northward, still on the road toward his ranch,
and he was slowly coming up with them.

But before he had covered another mile he was delayed by Sam Pepper,
riding in furious haste toward a meeting with him. Torrance would have
pressed on but for Sam’s insistence; Sam had a lot to say and said it.

“I was on my way when I heard them hellions come swooping along,” said
Sam. “Me, I pulled aside the road and let ’em have it. But I was close
enough and there was light enough for me to make ’em out; there was one
man leading the way and if he wasn’t Steve Bordereau I’ll swallow your
spurs.”

“Sally Dawn--”

“I know about her, too. She rode over to your place just a little while
ago; I was still there; had went out to the bunk house and was gabbing
with your men. She was looking for you; said Florinda sent her and she
was to tell you Bordereau was high-tailing out this way to get your
scalp. I told her you’d cut cross the hills to her place; so she done
the same. Then I told your hired hands that they’d better look out for
Bordereau and his killers, and I did some high-tailing on my own.”

Torrance breathed easier.

“So Sally Dawn’s left and gone home? That’s good news, Sam. Now in a
couple of minutes you will meet up with some of the boys following me;
tell them what you’ve told me. I’m on my way.”

“Hey, there!” yipped Sam. “There must be ten or a dozen of them boys
with Steve. You better--”

But Torrance was already off, his horse at a run. Sam sat undecided
a moment; then he heard a drumming of hoofs coming along from
Sundown-way, knew that here must come the boys who Torrance had said
were following him, and waited out in the middle of the road for their
arrival. As they slowed down he made out who several of them were,
friends all, and called to them all he knew of the night’s happenings.

“Jim’s overtaking them hellers,” he said, “and he’ll do it, and it’s
just him against the crowd. His men, this being no fight of their’n,
skipped out of the bunk house as soon’s they heard what Sally Dawn had
to say. And--”

“Come ahead!” sang out Dave Drennen. “We’ll be with Torrance before
they can burn him down.”

“Listen to me--” began an excited Sam.

They listened no longer. Bill Yarbo, riding by him, almost riding him
down, drenched him with big, booming, mocking laughter.

“You hang back here, Sam,” he said. “Safer. Or run get Mrs. Sam to hide
you under her apron!”

Whatever Sam screamed after him was drowned out by the thunder of
hoofs. Sam whirled his own horse about, dug his heels in and followed
them. But long before any of them got to Jim Torrance’s ranch, before
even Jim himself had reached there, they knew that Bordereau had
already arrived, had tarried briefly and had gone on his way.

That was because they saw the red flare in the night sky. Jim’s house,
his bunk house, his barn, all were in flames.

So it was as bright as day out in the road when they pulled in at
Torrance’s gate and came up with him. He was on foot, and waved them to
a stop; he was stooping low, looking for tracks in the road.

When he straightened up, “They’ve cut across the road here,” he
said. “They’re headed across the hills, over the old Parker place.
They’re headed toward the King Cannon ranch. And they’re riding
hell-for-leather!”

Again he led the way, this time with the others keeping as close to him
as they could; very close at first, but within ten minutes he was far
out ahead of them.

So he came alone through the trees dotting the hills of the old Parker
ranch to an open spot from which he could look down into the valley
that was the heart of the King Cannon ranch, and he saw first of all
a flush against the sky, like a hot summer dawn. But it wasn’t dawn
and it wasn’t summer, and he knew that he was right in judging that
Bordereau had come this way. That rosy, softly fluttering light was the
light of a fire down where the ranch buildings were.

It struck Torrance that Bordereau must be mighty sure of himself!
Already the bunk house was blazing; the first spears of flame began
to stab through the barn’s walls. Torrance came rushing on. He saw
men--just dark, running figures--and he thought: “The house isn’t
burning. Why?” And then he was so close that he slid down from his
saddle and ran forward on foot.

A woman--the light was so flickering and false and filled with trickery
that at first he thought it was Sally Dawn--came running out of the
ranch house back door. She was screaming as she darted out into the
yard, trying frantically to gain the grove just back of the house. It
was the Indian woman who worked for Sally Dawn; Torrance made that
out just as he saw a running figure pounce upon her. Torrance, still
running, shot the man and saw him fall and saw the woman scramble to
her feet and vanish among the trees. He himself kept straight on to the
house, not stopping even while he fired and glanced aside. He thought:
“She’s running out of the house, so the house is being attacked. Maybe
Sally Dawn is in there now. Then Bordereau will be there.”

The first door he came to, at the side of the house, was locked. He
ran around to the rear and up the three steps to the kitchen porch. The
door there, too, was locked. He threw his weight against it.

Just then several men, he never knew how many, whether four or five or
six, came running from the direction of the barn shouting, “That you,
Steve?”

“You rats!” shouted Torrance. “Get to hell out of here if you can
travel any faster than a bullet!”

They opened fire on him, all of them together, and he, with his back
against the wall and a gun in each hand, his body partly in shadow,
gave them as good as they sent. How many of them he hit, how many he
missed, he was never to know. But he did see three men drop before,
simultaneously, two things happened. One was that the boys from Sundown
came swooping down the slope of the timbered hill, yelling like
Comanches and already beginning to shoot at what running targets they
saw. The other was that Jim Torrance’s two guns, both with cylinders
emptied, brought their hammers down with a click.

That was two things. A third came so swiftly that Torrance had not even
reloaded when he got its import. From within the house came the sounds
of an angry voice, shouting, and of the explosion of a shotgun. The
voice was Steve Bordereau’s! Who but Sally Dawn had fired the shotgun?

Torrance struck the door again with his shoulder, and this time its
ancient bolt dragged old screws out of the woodwork, and the door flew
open and Torrance burst in.

There was a coal oil lamp burning in the dining room, and the door was
open, so he had light enough to guide him. He hurried on through the
dining room. Just then all within the ranch house was perfectly still.
Outside, however, there was an inferno of noise; shots were popping
like firecrackers on the Fourth of July. Out there hell was riding on
bullets.

Then, above the lively young inferno outside, he again heard sounds
within the house. They came from upstairs; it sounded like a man
battering a door down. He ran to the staircase and when his foot was at
the bottom step he heard quite clearly Steve Bordereau saying stormily:

“Out you come and quick, and I won’t hurt you. Stay in there and I’ll
burn the house down, you in it. I’ve already set fire to your other
buildings. And when you open the door, shove that shotgun through,
butt-end first, or--”

No, Jim Torrance hadn’t heard all this from the bottom of the stairs.
By the time Bordereau had got that far he was nearly at the top, making
his rush in a sort of twilight, for all the light that came into the
upper hall was from the burning buildings, flickering through the
muslin curtains. Bordereau heard him and broke off and was still a
minute, then called out:

“Who’s there? That you, Clark? I told you--”

As Torrance’s eyes reached the level of the second story floor they
discovered Bordereau, who had quitted the locked door behind which
Sally Dawn was, and had turned to make out who came. And when no one
answered and he knew it wasn’t Clark Murdo his gun was in his hand.

Torrance knew the shot was coming and lurched sideways before it came,
and completed his upward rush. Bordereau fired again and at the same
instant Torrance hurled a heavy forty-four, useless now save as missile
or club, and heard the thud of it as it struck the other man somewhere
in the body.

“Torrance!” yelled Bordereau, and there was a world of gloating in his
voice, and triumph. “I’ve been waiting for now!”

He waited a split second too long, for while he was speaking, realizing
that he had his enemy unarmed and so sure of shooting him dead,
Torrance hurled his forty-four straight into Bordereau’s face, and
followed it up by catapulting his own body on Bordereau’s as the man
reeled back. Bordereau came up with his shoulders against the wall; he
fired a third time.

But now Torrance was on him and had locked one hand about Bordereau’s
gun wrist, and with the other was battering into an already bleeding
face. An instant later the two crashed to the floor, and a door was
whipped open and Sally Dawn came running to stand over them, a shotgun
in her hands.

“Jim! Jim!” she cried wildly. “Let him go--get away from him--give me a
chance--I’m going to shoot him--”

Torrance snapped at her:

“Stand back! Keep out. He’s got a gun in his hand! You run!”

“I won’t run! I’m not going to let him kill you! I tell you I am going
to kill him this time!”

She would have asked nothing better just then, knowing that it was
going to be Jim Torrance’s life or Steve Bordereau’s. But in the faint
light, with the two men now battling like a grim pair of wolves, never
still for an instant, rolling and twisting and flailing about, she
couldn’t even make out which one of them was Jim, which Bordereau.

Those moments were to her like a nightmare. She could hear the shouts
outside and the gunfire; a man screamed terribly and an even more
terrible sound in her ears was another man’s laugh cutting across the
tragic outcry. And she could see on the wall down the staircase the
flicker of a light that grew rosier and brighter as buildings burned
with higher leaping flames. And worst of all was it to stand there, her
weapon gripped so determinedly in her hands, and not be able to shove
its muzzle down against Steve Bordereau’s body and so end the thing. At
that second she would have pulled the trigger with no more compunction
than she would have slapped at a mosquito.

The two men in that fierce death-grip of theirs rolled to the top of
the staircase. Somehow Bordereau wrenched free and stood up. Sally
Dawn saw him clearly enough to make out who he was, and jerked up her
shotgun. At that same instant two other things happened. Bordereau
still had his gun in his hand and crooked his finger to the trigger,
sure this time he had Jim Torrance where he had long wanted him. But
Torrance wasn’t out of the fight yet; he rose as Bordereau rose, and
hurled himself forward. Bordereau’s gun exploded; a terrified Sally
Dawn didn’t know whether it had found its mark or not; all she knew was
what she saw, and that was the two bodies hurtling down the stairs, all
the way to the floor below.

Down there men were running into the house through the kitchen.
She couldn’t tell who they were but supposed and feared they were
Bordereau’s men. She was at the head of the stairs; she was on the
verge of emptying a shotgun among them when a roaring voice which she
knew, the voice of Lying Bill Yarbo, shouted:

“Jim! Where are you? We got ’em on the run.”

Sally Dawn screamed down to him:

“He and Steve Bordereau--they’re fighting. Bordereau has a gun--”

She ran down then, only to encounter the same condition which had
already made impossible her taking any hand. Torrance and Bordereau
were again struggling hand to hand, body to body. Then she heard Jim
Torrance laugh. Never in her life had she heard a man laugh like that;
never would she forget it.

“Bordereau!” he shouted. “You’ve dropped your gun--and now I’m going
to kill you! For what you’ve done to Florinda tonight, for what you’ve
done to Sally Dawn, and to me, and to a lot of others--I’m going to
kill you--now--with my hands!”

“Jim! You damn fool!” roared Lying Bill Yarbo. “Stand out of my way.
Let me shoot the ---- ---- ----!”

But Jim Torrance didn’t have it in him to stand aside for any man. His
lean hard fist was already on its way, and caught Bordereau under the
chin and sent him staggering back so that he came close to falling and
only gained his uncertain balance when he brought up against the hall
door which happened to be closed. He saw other men come running in from
the kitchen until the hall was filled with them, and in desperation he
tried to get the door open behind him and make his escape.

Then Jim Torrance laughed again, and again bore down on him. For as
long as it takes two infuriated men to exchange a dozen blows, they
stood there, hammering at each other. Again Torrance’s fist beat
Bordereau back as a club beats a man, and again Bordereau tottered--and
this time, before he could get control of himself, Torrance was again
on him, battering him. Once more the two men went down. They lay on the
floor rather more quietly this time. Their hands were at each other’s
throats.

Now and then a convulsive shudder shook them. Men crowded close; one of
them brought the lamp from the kitchen. Bordereau lay on his back; Jim
Torrance was on top of him; Torrance’s hands were at his throat, the
fingers almost sunk out of sight. Bordereau’s glaring eyes, horrible to
look at, seemed about to spring from his head--

It took four men to pull Torrance off, and when he was on his feet and
stood and looked down at the man he had beaten so close to death, Sally
Dawn saw his eyes and was afraid of him.

She threw the shotgun down and came running to him and caught his arm
in both her hands.

“Jim! Jim! Oh, Jim, please--for God’s sake, don’t! Just let them take
him away.”

At first he just tried to shake her off; he didn’t hear what she was
saying; he didn’t even know who she was.

“Let him get up,” he said to the men standing over the fallen man.
“Let him up. I’m going to beat hell out of him. Then I’m going to kill
him just as sure as he killed Florinda--just as sure as he killed my
pardner six years ago.”

Sally Dawn kept clinging to him, shaking his arm, pleading. He couldn’t
seem to brush her aside. Angrily he looked down at her and saw that it
was Sally Dawn.

“Jim!” she pleaded. And then, there before them all, she said huskily,
“Jim--if you love me--”

He put a hand up to his face; it was battered and torn and bloody. He
shook his head as though to get his thoughts clear, the way a horse
shakes its head when summer flies are at its eyes. Then he put his hand
down on her two and patted them gently.

“I won’t kill him, boys,” he said. “Maybe it’ll be a good thing if we
let this country know that the law is nosing in here and is coming to
stay. The law will hang him. Take him away.”

They took him away swiftly, men thick about him. And under a big oak,
from which Bordereau could take full advantage of the spectacular view
of buildings burning, they hanged him and let him kick his life out.
By this time there were thirty Sundown men on hand to officiate; not a
single dissenting voice was lifted when someone called for a rope.

CHAPTER XXIII

Men stood around and watched the outbuildings burn to the ground. There
was nothing they could do beyond making sure that the fires did not
spread, an unlikely thing at this time of year after the first rains
and snow flurries. Jim Torrance, staring frowningly at the devastating
flames, suddenly awoke to the fact that he was standing slightly apart
from the rest of the men but that he was not alone. At his side was
Sally Dawn Cannon, and for a little while she didn’t seem to realize
any more than he did that they were holding hands.

But this inactivity was of the shortest duration. Men scouted around to
check up on the results of the battle in loss of lives and injuries to
combatants on both sides. Dave Drennen, clutching a bleeding shoulder
on his way to the house and first aid, said in passing Torrance,

“They say Bordereau’s gang was thirteen strong tonight in Sundown.
Three of them got shot down at the Stag Horn. The boys have picked
up five more out here, dead or as good as dead. That’s not counting
Bordereau. Murdo was along; he’s dead out by the barn, shot through the
head.”

“Better go get that shoulder fixed up, Dave,” said Torrance. And to
young Pardee, passing close, he called: “Will you streak for a doctor?
Or be sure someone else goes?”

Just then a newcomer rode up, swung a pair of saddlebags down into
Pardee’s hands and dismounted.

“I thought there’d be a job for me,” he said. “So I followed on just
as soon as I heard there was apt to be a scrimmage tonight.” It was
Dr. Frank, the new man who had settled in Sundown recently, after the
taking off of Doc Taylor.

“There’s something else that’s got to be done right away,” said
Torrance to the several men who began to gather where he was. “Catch up
all the Bordereau horses; see how many are missing. Remember, he was
on his way out of here; there’s every chance he was carrying a lot of
money with him down to the border. And there happens to be a sizable
amount of gold that belongs to Sally Dawn Cannon. If the stuff is
missing, if some of the men got away on horseback, we’ve got to run ’em
down while the trail’s hot.”

They scattered on the run, and the round-up began.

Curly Redmond was carried into the house with three bullet holes in
him; Dr. Frank immediately set to work, and Sally Dawn, though pale and
shaken, aided him so ably that he grinned at her and patted her on the
curly head and said, “Good kid.”

One of Bordereau’s men, badly wounded, was brought to where Torrance
was. It was Joe Tortillas. Questioned, he was sullenly stubborn until
a rope was mentioned; then, in exchange for a promise not to hang him,
he answered. Yes, Steve had all the moneys with him; they were always
on his saddle. He rode the same horse he nearly always rode, a big bay
with white forefeet and a white nose. The horse had been left with the
other horses, two men guarding them; Joe didn’t know what had happened
to any of them, but thought they had stampeded when the shooting began.

Bill Yarbo came swaggering up. He had a lot to tell. You would have
thought--if you didn’t know him!--that he had just about cleaned up on
the whole gang single-handed. He himself had killed Clark Murdo; he had
shot Joe Tortillas; he had clubbed a couple of other jaspers over the
heads with his gun, saving ammunition--

“Here’s Bordereau’s horse!” someone sang out.

And here indeed came Bordereau’s horse from somewhere in the semi-dark
on the side of the house farthest from the fires. A man was riding it,
a little man looking all the littler from being established so high up
on such a big animal.

“Here she is, Jim,” the little man called down, and only then they
recognized Sam Pepper. “I grabbed Bordereau’s cayuse soon’s I seen it,
thinking most likely Steve would have Sally Dawn’s gold with him. Got
it, too.”

A man laughed and said: “Why, old Sam’s got more sense than all the
rest of us put together! He kept his mind on what counted.”

“Hell,” snorted Lying Bill Yarbo. “What Sam did was see a chance to
grab a horse and run for it! And it just happened to be Bordereau’s
horse!”

“The way I found the horse,” said Sam Pepper waspishly, “was that I
made out Clark Murdo running to grab it and skip out. I reckoned it
would be like him to grab all the loot, give him a chance.” He looked
down on Lying Bill, took a long, deep breath and rapped out, “So, me, I
shot Clark Murdo down, shot him through the head and--”

“You damn little liar!” roared Bill Yarbo. “You must of been
eavesdropping just now and heard me--”

A shout of laughter went up, drowning his voice.

* * * * *

“Seems to me,” said Jim Torrance, formerly marshal of Sundown, now
just an enthusiastic young rancher to whom the country looked for big
things, “that we’ve got a bully good chance--Steve Bordereau gave it to
us!--to save ourselves a lot of money right at the jump.”

Maybe Sally Dawn guessed what was coming, for she smiled at him and
made a brave endeavor to stifle her smile, and her cheeks grew a bit
pinker. It was a glorious winter morning. There had been rain and hail
and a light snowfall during the night, but now the skies were blue and
the sun was bright, and there was just enough snappy cold in the air to
make breathing a delight and to send one’s blood along dancingly.

“So we’re going to save some money,” she said, “when I feel so rich so
all of a sudden, and so unexpectedly?”

They rode on through the pines. She said, “Where do you think we are
going?” quite as though she didn’t know perfectly well.

On top of the gentle oak-and-pine-studded knoll where once he had
said something about one day building a home--not just a house, but a
home--they stopped. He said:

“I got a letter yesterday from three old friends of yours up in Canyon
City, sheriff, banker and medico. The banker suggested that someday I
might be able to use some additional funds, developing here; he said,
‘Come and get it; the bank’s yours.’ And the two other old boys wrote
together, ‘Let us know, so we can dance at the wedding, for we’re the
two damn best dancers either side the Rockies.’”

“Wedding?” said Sally Dawn. “What wedding?”

Jim Torrance eased himself sideways in the saddle and started rolling a
cigarette that never got rolled to completion.

“I was thinking,” he said. “My place is pretty well burned down, thanks
to Bordereau. So’s yours. Now, if we tore all the fences down between
us, and if we made us a place right here--”

“Duck pond, and everything?” said Sally Dawn.

It was then that he threw his cigarette away.

END

TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES:

Italicized text is surrounded by underscores: _italics_.

Perceived typographical errors have been corrected.

Inconsistencies in hyphenation have been standardized.

Archaic or variant spelling has been retained.

Extensive research did not uncover any evidence that the U.S. copyright
on this publication was renewed.

*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MARSHAL OF SUNDOWN ***

Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will
be renamed.

Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
States without permission and without paying copyright
royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™
concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may
do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
license, especially commercial redistribution.

START: FULL LICENSE

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE

PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project
Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.

Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™
electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your
possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person
or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this
agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™
electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the
Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual
works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting
free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™
works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily
comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when
you share it without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no
representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
country other than the United States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear
prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work
on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed,
performed, viewed, copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online
at www.gutenberg.org. If you
are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws
of the country where you are located before using this eBook.

1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is
derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works
posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
beginning of this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg™ License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format
other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official
version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website
(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the
full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works
provided that:

• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method
you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has
agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation.”

• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™
License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™
works.

• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.

• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works.

1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than
are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™
electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
cannot be read by your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right
of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
without further opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in
accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™
electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or
additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any
Defect you cause.

Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™

Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
from people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will
remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future
generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.

Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws.

The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website
and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact

Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state
visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate.

Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works

Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be
freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of
volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
edition.

Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
facility: www.gutenberg.org.

This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.